ControlSystem E

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Perfection in Automation

MASYS2KAT-E

B&

RC

on

tr

olS

ys

te

ms

Ov

er

vie

wC

at

alo

g1

1/2

00

1

B&R ControlSystemsOverview Catalog 11/2001

Version: 0111Model No.: MASYS2KAT-E

The software names, hardware names and trademarks used in this document are registered by the respective companies.

© 2001 BERNECKER + RAINER Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H.

B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001 1

2 B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Chapter 1 B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family

Chapter 2 B&R SYSTEM 2003



Chapter 5 B&R Logic Scanner

Chapter 6 Accessories



Table of Contents

Chapter 1: B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family ........................................................... 131. Modular Construction ................................................................................................................................. 13

1.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 131.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 131.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 14

2. System and I/O Bus ................................................................................................................................... 142.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 142.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 152.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 15

3. Supply Voltage ........................................................................................................................................... 163.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 and B&R SYSTEM 2005 ..................................................................................... 163.2 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 16

4. Terminal Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 174.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 174.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 174.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 17

5. Program Memory Modules ........................................................................................................................ 185.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 185.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 185.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 18

6. Local Expansion (Expansion I/O) .............................................................................................................. 196.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 196.2 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 196.3 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 196.4 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 20

7. Remote Expansion (Remote I/O) ............................................................................................................... 217.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 ............................................................................................................................. 217.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ............................................................................................................................. 237.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010 ............................................................................................................................. 24

8. Combination Possibilities using Local Expansions .................................................................................... 258.1 B&R 2005 on B&R 2010 ....................................................................................................................... 258.2 B&R 2010 on B&R 2005 ....................................................................................................................... 26

9. Combination Possibilities using Remote Expansions ................................................................................ 269.1 B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010 .................................................................................................. 26

Chapter 2: B&R SYSTEM 2003 ..................................................................................... 271. Module Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 27

1.1 Sorted Alphabetically according to Product ID ..................................................................................... 271.2 Sorted according to Group ................................................................................................................... 29

2. General Information ................................................................................................................................... 322.1 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................................... 322.2 Mounting Rail ........................................................................................................................................ 322.3 Module Rack ......................................................................................................................................... 322.4 Modules ................................................................................................................................................ 342.5 Installation Dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 372.6 Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 392.7 Terminal Block ...................................................................................................................................... 422.8 Module Slot Rules ................................................................................................................................ 432.9 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity ............................................................................. 45

3. Module Rack .............................................................................................................................................. 463.1 BP70x ................................................................................................................................................... 46

4. Bus Controller Modules ............................................................................................................................. 484.1 CAN Bus Controller .............................................................................................................................. 484.2 Remote I/O Bus Controller ................................................................................................................... 484.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 484.4 EX270 ................................................................................................................................................... 494.5 EX470 / EX770 ..................................................................................................................................... 504.6 EX477 / EX777 ..................................................................................................................................... 52

5. CPUs ......................................................................................................................................................... 54


Table of Contents

5.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 545.2 RS232 Interface .................................................................................................................................... 545.3 CAN Interface ....................................................................................................................................... 545.4 Local I/O Expansion using B&R 2003 Modules .................................................................................... 545.5 Local I/O on the CPU (4 slots) .............................................................................................................. 545.6 Application Examples ........................................................................................................................... 545.7 Programming ........................................................................................................................................ 555.8 Backup Battery ..................................................................................................................................... 555.9 Programming the FlashPROM ............................................................................................................. 555.10 Legend Sheets ................................................................................................................................... 555.11 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 555.12 CP430 / CP47x / CP77x ..................................................................................................................... 565.13 CP476 ................................................................................................................................................. 60

6. Program Memory Modules ........................................................................................................................ 636.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 636.2 ME770 .................................................................................................................................................. 64

7. Analog Interface (AF) Module .................................................................................................................... 657.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 657.2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 657.3 Module Overview .................................................................................................................................. 657.4 AF101 ................................................................................................................................................... 67

8. Digital Input Modules ................................................................................................................................. 688.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 688.2 Input Filter ............................................................................................................................................. 688.3 Screw-in Module Overview ................................................................................................................... 688.4 I/O Module Overview ............................................................................................................................ 698.5 DI135 .................................................................................................................................................... 708.6 DI138 .................................................................................................................................................... 728.7 DI140 .................................................................................................................................................... 748.8 DI435 .................................................................................................................................................... 768.9 DI439.7 ................................................................................................................................................. 778.10 DI439.72 ............................................................................................................................................. 798.11 DI645 .................................................................................................................................................. 81

9. Digital Output Modules .............................................................................................................................. 829.1 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 829.2 Protective Circuit .................................................................................................................................. 829.3 Screw-in Module Overview ................................................................................................................... 829.4 I/O Module Overview ............................................................................................................................ 829.5 DO135 .................................................................................................................................................. 839.6 DO138 .................................................................................................................................................. 859.7 DO164 .................................................................................................................................................. 879.8 DO435 .................................................................................................................................................. 899.9 DO720 .................................................................................................................................................. 919.10 DO721 ................................................................................................................................................ 939.11 DO722 ................................................................................................................................................ 95

10. Digital Mixed Modules .............................................................................................................................. 9710.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 9710.2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 9710.3 DM435 ................................................................................................................................................ 9810.4 DM438 .............................................................................................................................................. 10010.5 DM465 .............................................................................................................................................. 102

11. Analog Input Modules ............................................................................................................................ 10411.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 10411.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 10411.3 AI261 ................................................................................................................................................ 10511.4 AI294 ................................................................................................................................................ 10711.5 AI351 ................................................................................................................................................ 10811.6 AI354 ................................................................................................................................................ 10911.7 AI774 ................................................................................................................................................ 110


Table of Contents

12. Analog Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 11112.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 11112.2 AO352 .............................................................................................................................................. 112

13. Temperature Modules ............................................................................................................................ 11313.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 11313.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 11313.3 AT324 ............................................................................................................................................... 11413.4 AT352 ............................................................................................................................................... 11613.5 AT664 ............................................................................................................................................... 117

14. Other Modules ....................................................................................................................................... 11914.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 11914.2 Combination Modules ....................................................................................................................... 11914.3 B&R 2003 Expansions for CP476 .................................................................................................... 11914.4 Motor Modules .................................................................................................................................. 11914.5 CM211 .............................................................................................................................................. 12014.6 CM411 .............................................................................................................................................. 12314.7 ME010 .............................................................................................................................................. 12514.8 ME020 .............................................................................................................................................. 12714.9 MM424 .............................................................................................................................................. 12914.10 MM432 ............................................................................................................................................ 131

15. Communication Modules ....................................................................................................................... 13315.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 13315.2 IF311 ................................................................................................................................................ 13415.3 IF321 ................................................................................................................................................ 13515.4 IF361 ................................................................................................................................................ 13615.5 IF371 ................................................................................................................................................ 137

16. Counter and Positioning Modules .......................................................................................................... 13816.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 13816.2 NC161 .............................................................................................................................................. 139

17. Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 14117.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 14117.2 AC010 / AC020 ................................................................................................................................. 14117.3 AC011 ............................................................................................................................................... 14217.4 TB722 ............................................................................................................................................... 14317.5 TB733 ............................................................................................................................................... 14417.6 TB736 ............................................................................................................................................... 14517.7 TB754 ............................................................................................................................................... 14617.8 TB772 ............................................................................................................................................... 147

18. Manuals ................................................................................................................................................. 14718.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 147

Chapter 3: B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................................................... 1491. Module Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 149

1.1 Sorted Alphabetically according to Product ID ................................................................................. 1491.2 Sorted according to Group ................................................................................................................. 151

2. General Information ................................................................................................................................. 1542.1 Dimensions ......................................................................................................................................... 1542.2 Basic Module Construction ................................................................................................................. 1542.3 Module Rack ....................................................................................................................................... 1552.4 Mounting Rail ...................................................................................................................................... 1552.5 Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 1562.6 Terminal Block TB170 ........................................................................................................................ 1582.7 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity ........................................................................... 159

3. Module Rack ............................................................................................................................................ 1593.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 1593.2 BP150 / BP151 / BP152 / BP155 ....................................................................................................... 160

4. Power Supply Modules ............................................................................................................................ 1614.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 1614.2 Safety Features .................................................................................................................................. 161


Table of Contents

4.3 Special Functions ............................................................................................................................... 1614.4 Expansion Slot .................................................................................................................................... 1614.5 Expansion Slave (local expansion) ..................................................................................................... 1614.6 Remote Slave (remote expansion) ..................................................................................................... 1614.7 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1624.8 PS465 / PS477 ................................................................................................................................... 1634.9 PS692 / PS694 ................................................................................................................................... 1654.10 PS792 / PS794 ................................................................................................................................. 167

5. Bus Controller Modules ........................................................................................................................... 1695.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1695.2 EX150 ................................................................................................................................................. 1695.3 EX250 ................................................................................................................................................. 1715.4 EX350 ................................................................................................................................................. 173

6. CPUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 1746.1 Programming ...................................................................................................................................... 1746.2 Buffering ............................................................................................................................................. 1746.3 Programming the FlashPROM ........................................................................................................... 1746.4 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1746.5 CP260 ................................................................................................................................................. 1756.6 IF260 .................................................................................................................................................. 1776.7 IP161 .................................................................................................................................................. 1796.8 XP152 ................................................................................................................................................. 182

7. Programmable Modules ........................................................................................................................... 1847.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1847.2 DM455 ................................................................................................................................................ 185

8. Digital Input Modules ............................................................................................................................... 1878.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 1878.2 Input Filter ........................................................................................................................................... 1878.3 Sink/Source Connections ................................................................................................................... 1888.4 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1888.5 DI450 .................................................................................................................................................. 1898.6 DI475 / DI476 ..................................................................................................................................... 1918.7 DI477 .................................................................................................................................................. 1938.8 DI486 .................................................................................................................................................. 1948.9 DI695 .................................................................................................................................................. 195

9. Digital Output Modules ............................................................................................................................ 1969.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 1969.2 Protective Circuit ................................................................................................................................ 1969.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1969.4 DO479 / DO480 .................................................................................................................................. 1979.5 DO650 / DO750 .................................................................................................................................. 1999.6 DO690 ................................................................................................................................................ 2019.7 DO760 ................................................................................................................................................ 203

10. Digital Mixed Modules ............................................................................................................................ 20510.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 20510.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 20510.3 DM476 .............................................................................................................................................. 206

11. Analog Input Modules ............................................................................................................................ 20811.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 20811.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 20811.3 AI350 / AI375 / AI775 ....................................................................................................................... 209

12. Analog Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 21012.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 21012.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 21012.3 AO350 / AO775 ................................................................................................................................ 211

13. Analog Mixed Modules .......................................................................................................................... 21213.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 21213.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 21213.3 AM050 .............................................................................................................................................. 213


Table of Contents

13.4 AM051 .............................................................................................................................................. 21513.5 AM055 .............................................................................................................................................. 21713.6 AM374 .............................................................................................................................................. 219

14. Temperature Modules ............................................................................................................................ 22114.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 22114.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 22114.3 AT350 / AT450 ................................................................................................................................. 22214.4 AT660 ............................................................................................................................................... 224

15. Communication Modules ....................................................................................................................... 22615.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 22615.2 IF050 ................................................................................................................................................ 22715.3 IF060 ................................................................................................................................................ 22915.4 IF613 ................................................................................................................................................ 23015.5 IF621 ................................................................................................................................................ 23115.6 IF622 ................................................................................................................................................ 23315.7 IF661 ................................................................................................................................................ 23515.8 IF671 ................................................................................................................................................ 23615.9 IF672 ................................................................................................................................................ 23815.10 IF681.95 ......................................................................................................................................... 24015.11 IF681.96 ......................................................................................................................................... 24215.12 NW150 ............................................................................................................................................ 244

16. Counter and Positioning Modules .......................................................................................................... 24516.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 24516.2 NC150 .............................................................................................................................................. 24616.3 NC154 .............................................................................................................................................. 24816.4 NC157 .............................................................................................................................................. 252

17. Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 25517.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 25517.2 AC240 ............................................................................................................................................... 25617.3 Cable NC154 - PC ............................................................................................................................ 25717.4 BM150 .............................................................................................................................................. 25817.5 TB162 ............................................................................................................................................... 25917.6 TB170 ............................................................................................................................................... 260


Chapter 4: B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................................................... 2631. Module Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 263

1.1 Sorted Alphabetically according to Product ID ................................................................................. 2631.2 Sorted according to Group ................................................................................................................. 264

2. General Information ................................................................................................................................. 2672.1 Dimensions ......................................................................................................................................... 2672.2 Basic Module Construction ................................................................................................................. 2672.3 Differences between System and I/O Modules .................................................................................. 2682.4 Module Rack ....................................................................................................................................... 2692.5 Mounting Rail ...................................................................................................................................... 2702.6 Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 2702.7 Terminal Block TB120 / TB140 ........................................................................................................... 2732.8 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity ........................................................................... 274

3. Module Rack ............................................................................................................................................ 2753.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 2753.2 Configuration of the Various Module Racks ....................................................................................... 2763.3 BP101 / BP110 / BP200 / BP201 / BP202 / BP210 / BP300 .............................................................. 278

4. Power Supply Modules ............................................................................................................................ 2794.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 2794.2 Safety Features .................................................................................................................................. 2794.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 2794.4 Power Supply Module Location .......................................................................................................... 2794.5 PS425 ................................................................................................................................................. 282


Table of Contents

4.6 PS740 ................................................................................................................................................. 2835. Bus Controller Modules ........................................................................................................................... 285

5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 2855.2 EX100 / EX200 ................................................................................................................................... 2865.3 EX301 / EX302 ................................................................................................................................... 288

6. CPUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 2896.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 2896.2 Status Area ......................................................................................................................................... 2896.3 Connection area ................................................................................................................................. 2896.4 Safety Features .................................................................................................................................. 2906.5 Programming ...................................................................................................................................... 2906.6 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 2906.7 CP100 / CP104 / CP200 / CP210 ....................................................................................................... 291

7. Programmable Modules ........................................................................................................................... 2937.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 2937.2 DS100 ................................................................................................................................................. 2947.3 DS101 ................................................................................................................................................. 2977.4 MP100 ................................................................................................................................................ 300

8. Program Memory Modules ...................................................................................................................... 3028.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 3028.2 Buffering the RAM .............................................................................................................................. 3028.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 3028.4 ME910 / ME913 / ME915 ................................................................................................................... 303

9. Digital Input Modules ............................................................................................................................... 3049.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 3049.2 Input Filter ........................................................................................................................................... 3049.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 3049.4 Sink/Source Connections ................................................................................................................... 3059.5 DI400 .................................................................................................................................................. 3069.6 DI425 / DI426 ..................................................................................................................................... 3089.7 DI725 .................................................................................................................................................. 3099.8 DI825 .................................................................................................................................................. 310

10. Digital Output Modules .......................................................................................................................... 31210.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 31210.2 Protective circuit ............................................................................................................................... 31210.3 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 31210.4 DO428 / DO430 ................................................................................................................................ 31310.5 DO600 / DO700 ................................................................................................................................ 31510.6 DO710 .............................................................................................................................................. 317

11. Analog Input Modules ............................................................................................................................ 31911.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 31911.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 31911.3 AI300 / AI700 .................................................................................................................................... 32011.4 AI730 ................................................................................................................................................ 321

12. Analog Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 32212.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 32212.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 32212.3 AO300 / AO725 / AO900 .................................................................................................................. 323

13. Temperature Modules ............................................................................................................................ 32413.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 32413.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 32413.3 AT300 ............................................................................................................................................... 32513.4 AT610 ............................................................................................................................................... 326

14. Other Modules ....................................................................................................................................... 32814.1 General Information .......................................................................................................................... 32814.2 UM900 .............................................................................................................................................. 329

15. Communication Modules ....................................................................................................................... 33115.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 33115.2 IF100 / IF101 .................................................................................................................................... 332


Table of Contents

15.3 NW100 .............................................................................................................................................. 33416. Counter and Positioning Modules .......................................................................................................... 335

16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 33516.2 NC303 .............................................................................................................................................. 336

17. Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 33917.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 33917.2 BM100 .............................................................................................................................................. 34017.3 TB120 / TB140 ................................................................................................................................. 341


Chapter 5: B&R Logic Scanner .................................................................................. 3431. Module Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 3432. General Information ................................................................................................................................. 344

2.1 B&R PLC Operating System .............................................................................................................. 3443. CPUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 345

3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 3453.2 LS251 ................................................................................................................................................. 346

4. Communication Modules ......................................................................................................................... 3494.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 3494.2 LS071 ................................................................................................................................................. 3504.3 LS079 ................................................................................................................................................. 352

5. Manuals ................................................................................................................................................... 3545.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 354

Chapter 6: Accessories ............................................................................................... 3551. Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 3552. General Accessories ................................................................................................................................ 356

2.1 AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V ................................................................................................................. 3562.2 AC410 Interface Converter ................................................................................................................. 3562.3 AC912 Bus Adapter, CAN 1x ............................................................................................................. 3572.4 AC913 Bus Adapter, CAN 2x ............................................................................................................. 3582.5 AC916 Bus Termination, RS485 Active .............................................................................................. 3592.6 RS485 Bus Connector ........................................................................................................................ 3592.7 AC911 Bus Connector, CAN .............................................................................................................. 3602.8 TB124 24 Pin Terminal Block ............................................................................................................. 3612.9 TB710 10 Pin Terminal Block ............................................................................................................. 3622.10 TB712 12 Pin Terminal Block ........................................................................................................... 3632.11 TB718 18 Pin Terminal Block ........................................................................................................... 3642.12 INT1 Interface Converter .................................................................................................................. 365

Chapter 7: Standards and Certifications ................................................................... 3671. Standards and Limits Used ...................................................................................................................... 367

1.1 Limits ......................................................................................................................................... 3671.2 International Standards ...................................................................................................................... 368


Table of Contents


Cha

pter

1B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

000

Con

trol F

amily

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Modular Construction

Chapter 1 • B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family

1. Modular Construction

1.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003

Controller and I/O modules are hung in the module rack and screwed to a threaded strip which is inserted in the aluminum frame. The electrical connection between the modules is achieved by pushing the modules together (connectors integrated in the modules).

The module rack is installed on a mounting rail (DIN EN 50022 - 35 x 7.5 mm). This mounting rail is attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet.

1.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

The B&R SYSTEM 2005 consists of encased modules. The modules (except the power supply and the CPU) can be inserted in any order on a backplane. The backplane is installed on a mounting rail (DIN EN 50022 - 35 x 7.5 mm). This mounting rail is attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet.

Both the bus system and the supply lines are on the backplane. Backplanes are available in different lengths (6, 9, 12, 15 slots).

Diagram 1: Modular construction of B&R SYSTEM 2003



B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • System and I/O Bus

1.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

The B&R SYSTEM 2010 consists of encased modules, which are attached to a modular backplane. The backplane is installed on a mounting rail (DIN EN 50022 - 35 x 7.5 mm). This mounting rail is attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet.

2. System and I/O Bus

2.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003

The B&R SYSTEM 2003 has an I/O bus. The electrical connection between the modules is achieved by pushing the modules together (connectors integrated in the modules).

• Standard field bus technology

• Compact design

• Integrated terminals

- 2 or 3 line connections

- No extra terminals needed


Diagram 4: System and I/O Bus B&R SYSTEM 2003


Cha

pter

1B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

000

Con

trol F

amily

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • System and I/O Bus

2.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

There is a combined I/O and system bus on every B&R SYSTEM 2005 backplane. Therefore system and I/O modules can be inserted on the main backplane. The backplane where the CPU is installed is the main backplane.

• Combined system and I/O bus

• Only one backplane type is required for main and expansion backplanes (eases stock management)

• Secure protocol for I/O data transfer (expansion)

2.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

One characteristic of the B&R SYSTEM 2010 is the separation of the bus system into a system and I/O bus. I/O and power supply modules are connected to the I/O bus and system modules (e.g. network modules, multiprocessors) are connected to the system bus.

• Separate System and I/O Bus

• Different backplane modules are required for system and I/O bus

• Secure protocol for I/O data transfer

• High data throughput because the system and I/O bus do not influence each other:

- The I/O bus manages the mostly constant, deterministic and cyclic data for classic PLC modules (e.g. digital or analog I/O modules).

- The system bus sporadically handles large amounts of data, which does not affect data flow on the I/O bus because of the separated bus system.




B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Supply Voltage

3. Supply Voltage

3.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003 and B&R SYSTEM 2005

The systems have a central supply. The supply voltage is either 24 VDC ±25 % or 90 to 250 VAC.

3.2 B&R SYSTEM 2010

The B&R SYSTEM 2010 uses a decentralized supply voltage. Any number of power supply modules can be installed on the I/O bus to provide power to the I/O and system modules via the bus system.

It is possible to integrate a redundant supply voltage into the system by installing more power supplies than are actually needed. This ensures that the PLC will always be supplied with power, even if one of the power supply modules drops out.


Cha

pter

1B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

000

Con

trol F

amily

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Terminal Blocks

4. Terminal Blocks

4.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003

B&R 2003 modules use a large number of terminal blocks to make connections. The construction of the terminal blocks has the following advantages for the PLC user:

• Terminal blocks can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module or directly on the terminal blocks.

• Most terminal blocks are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps.

4.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

B&R SYSTEM 2005 modules are connected using the a single row terminal block.

The construction of the terminal block has the following advantages for the PLC user:

• The terminal block can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module.

• The terminal blocks are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps.

4.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

B&R SYSTEM 2010 modules are connected with easy to use 20 pin terminal blocks (TB120) or 40 pin terminal blocks (TB140).

Screw clamp Cage clamp

Diagram 7: Terminal blocks B&R SYSTEM 2003

Screw clamp Cage clamp


TB120 TB140



B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Program Memory Modules

5. Program Memory Modules

5.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003

5.1.1 CPU - PLC 2003

When using a B&R CPU, application programs and the operating system are stored in the CPU.

5.1.2 Remote Slaves

When used as a remote I/O slave, the application programs are stored in the remote master (e.g. EX150) . The operating system is programmed in the remote I/O bus controller.

5.1.3 CAN Slaves

When used as a CAN slave, the application programs are stored in the CAN master (e.g. XP152). The operating system is programmed in the CAN bus controller. Configuration data can be placed in configuration memory (inserted from the front).

The CAN bus controller EX270 is equipped with an internal S-EEPROM. Operating system parameters can be stored in this S-EEPROM.

5.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPUs have the memory for application programs and the operating system integrated in the module.

5.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

All the software necessary for the B&R SYSTEM 2010 PLC (operating system, application programs) is stored in application memory. The application memory is inserted into the front of a processor module.

Diagram 10: Program memory module B&R SYSTEM 2010


Cha

pter

1B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

000

Con

trol F

amily

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Local Expansion (Expansion I/O)

6. Local Expansion (Expansion I/O)

6.1 General Information

To save space, the B&R SYSTEM 2005 and 2010 can be separated into several bus segments. With local expansion, the expansion rack is attached near the main rack (usually in the same control cabinet).

6.2 B&R SYSTEM 2003

Local I/O bus expansion is not possible with this system.

6.3 B&R SYSTEM 2005

The main rack contains the CPU. Expansion racks do not have CPUs, but they have their own power supply modules. A CPU with expansion master is required in the main rack, and a power supply module with expansion slave is required in the expansion rack. Up to four expansion slaves can be operated from by expansion master.

Diagram 11: B&R SYSTEM 2005 local expansion (expansion I/O)


B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Local Expansion (Expansion I/O)

6.4 B&R SYSTEM 2010

Up to 99 modules (I/O modules, power supply modules, expansion modules) can be addressed on the I/O bus of a B&R 2010 system. This I/O bus can be split up into several bus segments using expansion modules.

Therefore, the I/O modules are not restricted by the size and shape of the control cabinet. You can always use the maximum number of slots for I/O modules without worrying about the space required (except for the slots for the expansion master, expansion slave and power supply modules). The following should be noted when splitting up the local I/O bus into several sections:

• An expansion master can be operated on any bus segment on level 1 or 2 (see diagram) in any slot on the I/O bus.

• The expansion slave is always located in the far left slot of a bus segment.

• A separate backplane module (BP202) is required for the expansion slave.

Diagram 12: B&R SYSTEM 2010 local expansion (expansion I/O)


Cha

pter

1B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

000

Con

trol F

amily

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Remote Expansion (Remote I/O)

7. Remote Expansion (Remote I/O)

Expansion racks can be up to 1200 meters from the main rack when using remote expansion (remote I/O). With repeaters, the network can be extended even further. A remote I/O master module is required in the main rack, and a remote I/O slave module is required in the expansion rack. Up to 31 remote I/O slaves can be operated by one remote I/O master without a repeater, or up to 126 remote I/O slaves with a repeater.

7.1 B&R SYSTEM 2003

Two types of expansion are possible:

• Remote I/O bus

• CAN field bus

7.1.1 Remote I/O Bus

The remote master is a B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner. To be able to use a B&R SYSTEM 2003 as a slave in a remote I/O network, a remote I/O bus controller EX477 or EX777 is required.

Diagram 13: Remote expansion on remote I/O bus



7.1.2 CAN Field Bus

The CAN master is a B&R SYSTEM 2003, B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner. To add a B&R SYSTEM 2003 to a CAN network, a EX270, EX470 or EX770 CAN bus controller is required.

Diagram 14: Remote expansion (remote I/O) on CAN field bus


Cha

pter

1B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

000

Con

trol F

amily


7.2 B&R SYSTEM 2005

Diagram 15: B&R SYSTEM 2005



7.3 B&R SYSTEM 2010

Each remote I/O slave can address up to a maximum of 99 modules. Separation into several bus segments is also possible since each remote I/O unit has its own I/O bus.

Diagram 16: B&R SYSTEM 2010


Cha

pter

1B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

000

Con

trol F

amily

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Combination Possibilities using Local Expansions

8. Combination Possibilities using Local Expansions

8.1 B&R 2005 on B&R 2010

A B&R 2005 expansion backplane is coupled to a B&R 2010 expansion master using a power supply with expansion slave. The entire configuration can have a maximum of four B&R 2005 expansion backplanes.

Diagram 17: B&R SYSTEM 2005 on 2010


B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family • Combination Possibilities using Remote Expansions

8.2 B&R 2010 on B&R 2005

A 2010 I/O bus is coupled to the 2005 using an expansion slave. A maximum of twenty 2010 I/O modules can be connected in this way.

9. Combination Possibilities using Remote Expansions

9.1 B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010

Up to 31 remote slaves can be connected to a remote master (B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner) and the B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010 systems can be combined as desired.

Diagram 18: B&R SYSTEM 2010 on 2005

Slave Type Number of Slots

2010 Max. 99 (daisy chained)

2005 Max. 13

2003 Max. 8

Table 1: Remote slave slots


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Module Overview

Chapter 2 • B&R SYSTEM 2003

1. Module Overview

1.1 Sorted Alphabetically according to Product ID

Product ID Description Power Model No. Page

--- B&R 2003 User’s Manual, German MASYS22003-0 147

--- B&R 2003 User’s Manual, English MASYS22003-E 147

AC010 5 bus covers 7AC010.9 141

AC011 5 stress relief attachments including mounting material 7AC011.9 142

AC020 1 bus cover 7AC020.9 141

AF101 Adapter module AF101 -0.3 W 7AF101.7 67

AI261 1 input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge, 24 bit resolution -0.6 W 7AI261.7 105

AI294 4 inputs for potentiometer displacement gauge, 13 bit resolution -0.5 W 7AI294.7 107

AI351 1 input ±10 V or 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution + sign U/I: -0.3 WPot.: -0,7

W

7AI351.70 108

AI354 4 inputs ±10 V, 12 bit resolution + sign -0.5 W 7AI354.70 109

AI774 4 inputs 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution -0.4 W 7AI774.70 110

AO352 2 outputs ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA -1.2 W 7AO352.70 112

AT324 4 inputs for temperature sensors (PT100 / PT1000 / KTY10-6 / KTY84-130) -0.1 W 7AT324.70 114

AT352 2 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) -0.4 W 7AT352.70 116

AT664 4 inputs for thermocouples -0.4 W 7AT664.70 117

BP701.1 Module rack, for 1 module, incl. right side section 7BP701.1 46

BP702 Module rack, for 2 modules 7BP702.0 46

BP702.1 Module rack, for 2 modules, incl. right side section 7BP702.1 46









CM211 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 20 kHz, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, 2 analog inputs ±10 V or 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution, 2 analog outputs ±10 V, 12 bit resolution

-1.5 W 7CM211.7 120

CM411 3 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 50 kHz, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 2 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, 3 analog inputs ±10 V, 16 bit resolution, 3 analog outputs ±10 V, 16 bit resolution

-2.4 W 7CM411.70-1 123

CP430 CPU, 24 VDC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM +7 W 1) 7CP430.60-1 56


CP474 CPU, 24 VDC, CP Interface, 100 KByte SRAM, 512 KByte FlashPROM +12.6 W 3) 7CP474.60-1 56

CP476 CPU, 24 VDC, CP Interface, 750 KByte SRAM, 1.5 MByte FlashPROM, system bus for expansion modules

+12.5 W 3) 7CP476.60-1 56

CP770 CPU, 100 - 240 VAC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM +14 W 3) 7CP770.60-1 56

CP774 CPU, 100 - 240 VAC, CP Interface, 100 KByte SRAM, 512 KByte FlashPROM +12.6 W 3) 7CP774.60-1 56

DI135 4 Inputs, 24 VDC, event counter mode: 100 kHz, 1 comparator output, 24 VDC 50 kHz, 1 comparator output, 24 VDC

-0.4 W 7DI135.70 70

Table 1: Module overview: Sorted alphabetically according to product ID



DI138 10 Inputs, 24 VDC, 2 inputs for event counter mode, input frequency 20 kHz -0.4 W 7DI138.70 72

DI140 10 Inputs, 24 VDC, 2 inputs for event counter or incremental encoder operation,input frequency 50 kHz

-0.4 W 7DI140.70 74

DI435 8 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms -0.2 W 7DI435.7 76

DI439.7 16 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms, termnal block connection -0.4 W 7DI439.7 77

DI439.72 16 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms, D-type connection -0.4 W 7DI439.72 79

DI645 8 inputs, 100 - 240 VAC, input delay 50 ms -0.2 W 7DI645.7 81

DM435 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC,0.5 A, terminal connection

-0.5 W 7DM435.7 98

DM438 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A -0.5 W 7DM438.72 100

DM465 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 16 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A

-1.1 W 7DM465.7 102

DO135 4 FET outputs, 12 - 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 100 kHz -0.2 W 7DO135.70 83

DO138 8 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A -0.25 W 7DO138.70 85

DO164 4 FET outputs (4 triac couplers), 48 - 125 VAC, 50 mA, zero voltage input -0.6 W 7DO164.70 87

DO435 8 channels, each channel can be declared either as output or inputMax. 8 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A, max. 8 inputs, 24 VDC, inputs delay 1 ms

-0.5 W 7DO435.7 89

DO720 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A -1.4 W 7DO720.7 91


DO722 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 24 VDC, 2.5 A -1.4 W 7DO722.7 95

EX270 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC supply +4 W 7EX270.50-1 49

EX470 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC supply +14 W 2) 7EX470.50-1 50

EX477 Remote I/O bus controller, 24 VDC supply +14 W 7EX477.50-2 52

EX770 CAN bus controller, 100 - 240 VAC supply +14 W 3) 7EX770.50-1 50

EX777 Remote I/O bus controller, 100 - 240 VAC supply +14 W 7EX777.50-1 52

IF311 Interface module with RS232 interface without PW operator panel with PW panel P120 / P121

-0.5 W-1.6 W

7IF311.7 134

IF321 Interface module with RS485/RS422 interface -1.4 W 7IF321.7 135

IF361 Interface module with RS485 interface (PROFIBUS-DP slave) -2.6 W 7IF361.70-1 136

IF371 Interface module with CAN interface -2.5 W 7IF371.70-1 137

ME010 CP476 expansion, 1 PCMCIA slot -0.35 W 7ME010.9 125

ME020 CP476 expansion, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 slot for interface modules -0.7 W 7ME020.9 127

ME770 Configuration memory for CAN bus controller -0.1 W 7ME770.5 64

MM424 Motor module, 4 motor digital output levels, 24 VDC, 2 A at 50 °C, max. starting current 10 A (max. 50 ms)

-0.5 W 7MM424.70-1 129

MM432 Motor bridge module, 2 motor (H) bridges, 10 - 30 VDC @ 4 A, peak current up to 8 A (max. 2 s), 12 digital 24 V inputs, optional for limit monitoring and position acquisition (counter functions, 20 kHz A/B/R evaluation)

-2.5 W 7MM432.70-1 131

NC161 Encoder module, input frequency 100 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit resolution -0.3 W-IEncoder* 5.4 V

7NC161.7 139

TB722 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, screw clamps 7TB722.9 143

TB722 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, cage clamps 7TB722.91 143








1) Integrated power supply for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P1202) EX470 with revision 30.xx or higher3) EX770 with revision 10.xx or higher


Table 1: Module overview: Sorted alphabetically according to product ID (cont.)


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


1.2 Sorted according to Group


Module Rack

BP701.1 Module rack, for 1 module, incl. right side section 7BP701.1 46


BP702.1 Module rack, for 2 modules, incl. right side section 7BP702.1 46









Bus Controller Modules

EX270 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC supply +4 W 7EX270.50-1 49

EX470 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC supply +14 W 1) 7EX470.50-1 50

EX477 Remote I/O bus controller, 24 VDC supply +14 W 7EX477.50-2 52

EX770 CAN bus controller, 100 - 240 VAC supply +14 W 2) 7EX770.50-1 50

EX777 Remote I/O bus controller, 100 - 240 VAC supply +14 W 7EX777.50-1 52

CPUs



CP474 CPU, 24 VDC, CP Interface, 100 KByte SRAM, 512 KByte FlashPROM +12.6 W 3) 7CP474.60-1 56

CP476 CPU, 24 VDC, CP Interface, 750 KByte SRAM, 1.5 MByte FlashPROM, system bus for expansion modules

+12.5 W 3) 7CP476.60-1 56

CP770 CPU, 100 - 240 VAC, 100 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM +14 W 3) 7CP770.60-1 56

CP774 CPU, 100 - 240 VAC, CP Interface, 100 KByte SRAM, 512 KByte FlashPROM +12.6 W 3) 7CP774.60-1 56

Program Memory Modules

ME770 Configuration memory for CAN bus controller -0.1 W 7ME770.5 64

Analog Interface (AF) Module

AF101 Adapter module AF101 -0.3 W 7AF101.7 67

Digital Input Modules

DI135 4 Inputs, 24 VDC, event counter mode: 100 kHz, 1 comparator output, 24 VDC 50 kHz, 1 comparator output, 24 VDC

-0.4 W 7DI135.70 70

DI138 10 Inputs, 24 VDC, 2 inputs for event counter mode, input frequency 20 kHz -0.4 W 7DI138.70 72

DI140 10 Inputs, 24 VDC, 2 inputs for event counter or incremental encoder operation,input frequency 50 kHz

-0.4 W 7DI140.70 74

DI435 8 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms -0.2 W 7DI435.7 76

DI439.7 16 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms, termnal block connection -0.4 W 7DI439.7 77

DI439.72 16 inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms, D-type connection -0.4 W 7DI439.72 79

DI645 8 inputs, 100 - 240 VAC, input delay 50 ms -0.2 W 7DI645.7 81

Digital Output Modules

DO135 4 FET outputs, 12 - 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 100 kHz -0.2 W 7DO135.70 83

DO138 8 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A -0.25 W 7DO138.70 85

DO164 4 FET outputs (4 triac couplers), 48 - 125 VAC, 50 mA, zero voltage input -0.6 W 7DO164.70 87

DO435 8 channels, each channel can be declared either as output or inputMax. 8 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A, max. 8 inputs, 24 VDC, inputs delay 1 ms

-0.5 W 7DO435.7 89



DO722 8 relay outputs, 240 VAC / 24 VDC, 2.5 A -1.4 W 7DO722.7 95

Digital Mixed Modules

DM435 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC,0.5 A, terminal connection

-0.5 W 7DM435.7 98

Table 2: B&R SYSTEM 2003 sorted according to group



DM438 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A -0.5 W 7DM438.72 100

DM465 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, input delay 1 ms and 16 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A

-1.1 W 7DM465.7 102

Analog Input Modules

AI261 1 input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge, 24 bit resolution -0.6 W 7AI261.7 105

AI294 4 inputs for potentiometer displacement gauge, 13 bit resolution -0.5 W 7AI294.7 107

AI351 1 input ±10 V or 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution + sign U/I: -0.3 WPot.: -0,7

W

7AI351.70 108

AI354 4 inputs ±10 V, 12 bit resolution + sign -0.5 W 7AI354.70 109

AI774 4 inputs 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution -0.4 W 7AI774.70 110

Analog Output Modules

AO352 2 outputs ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA -1.2 W 7AO352.70 112

Temperature Modules

AT324 4 inputs for temperature sensors (PT100 / PT1000 / KTY10-6 / KTY84-130) -0.1 W 7AT324.70 114

AT352 2 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) -0.4 W 7AT352.70 116

AT664 4 inputs for thermocouples -0.4 W 7AT664.70 117

Other Modules

CM211 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 20 kHz, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, 2 analog inputs ±10 V or 0 - 20 mA, 12 bit resolution, 2 analog outputs ±10 V, 12 bit resolution

-1.5 W 7CM211.7 120

CM411 3 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 50 kHz, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 2 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, 3 analog inputs ±10 V, 16 bit resolution, 3 analog outputs ±10 V, 16 bit resolution

-2.4 W 7CM411.70-1 123

ME010 CP476 expansion, 1 PCMCIA slot -0.35 W 7ME010.9 125

ME020 CP476 expansion, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 slot for interface modules -0.7 W 7ME020.9 127

MM424 Motor module, 4 motor digital output levels, 24 VDC, 2 A at 50 °C, max. starting current 10 A (max. 50 ms)

-0.5 W 7MM424.70-1 129

MM432 Motor bridge module, 2 motor (H) bridges, 10 - 30 VDC @ 4 A, peak current up to 8 A (max. 2 s), 12 digital 24 V inputs, optional for limit monitoring and position acquisition (counter functions, 20 kHz A/B/R evaluation)

-2.5 W 7MM432.70-1 131

Communication Modules

IF311 Interface module with RS232 interface without PW operator panelwith PW panel P120 / P121

-0.5 W-1.6 W

7IF311.7 134

IF321 Interface module with RS485/RS422 interface -1.4 W 7IF321.7 135

IF361 Interface module with RS485 interface (PROFIBUS-DP slave) -2.6 W 7IF361.70-1 136

IF371 Interface module with CAN interface -2.5 W 7IF371.70-1 137

Counter and Positioning Modules

NC161 Encoder module, input frequency 100 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit resolution -0.3 W-IEncoder* 5.4 V

7NC161.7 139

Accessories

AC010 5 bus covers 7AC010.9 141

AC011 5 stress relief attachments including mounting material 7AC011.9 142

AC020 1 bus cover 7AC020.9 141











Table 2: B&R SYSTEM 2003 sorted according to group (cont.)


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Manuals



1) EX470 with revision 30.xx or higher2) EX770 with revision 10.xx or higher3) Integrated power supply for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P120




B&R SYSTEM 2003 • General Information

2. General Information

2.1 Dimensions

All modules in the B&R 2003 system have the same dimensions. The dimensions of the B&R SYSTEM 2003 can be seen in the following diagram.

2.2 Mounting Rail

A mounting rail which conforms to the standard DIN EN 50022 is required to mount the PLC. This mounting rail is to be attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet.

Follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions!

2.3 Module Rack

Module racks for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 are aluminum frames which are available in different widths. Module racks with one or two side sections are used depending on the controller.

Dimensions [mm]

Height 115

Width 7BP7xx.0 7BP70x.1

M x 76.5 + 8.5 M x 76.5 + 4.5

Depth 70

M ... Max. number of modules on a module rack (see Module Rack)

Table 3: Dimensions

Diagram 1: Mounting Rail


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Example of a module rack with two side sections

2.3.1 Dimensions

All module racks are 115 mm high. Side sections and mounting screws must be included in the width of the module racks.

Module racks with two side sections (7BP7xx.0):approx. 8.5 mmModule racks with one side section (7BP70x.1):approx. 4.5 mm

Diagram 2: Module Rack

Module Rack Modules Width [mm]

BP701.1 1 81 1)

1) Includes 4.5 mm for one side section and mounting screws. These module racks are, for example, used together with the EX270 CAN bus controller.

BP702.1 2 157.5 1)

BP702 2 161.5 2)

2) Includes 8.5 mm for two side sections and mounting screws.

BP703 3 238 2)

BP704 4 314.5 2)

BP705 5 391 2)

BP706 6 467.5 2)

BP707 7 544 2)

BP708 8 620.5 2)

BP709 9 697 2)

BP710 10 773.5 2)

Table 4: Dimensions



2.4 Modules

B&R SYSTEM 2003 modules are divided into five groups:

• Controller

• CPUs

• I/O modules

• Screw-in modules (ScrM)

• Expansion modules for CP476

The technical data indicates which group the respective modules belong to.

Controller, CPU and I/O modules are hung in the module rack and screwed to a threaded strip which is inserted in the aluminum frame. The electrical connection between the modules is made using a 9 pin D-type plug and socket (simply push the modules together).

The risks surrounding typical ribbon cable, and inserting a module into the wrong slot no longer exist.

Screw-in modules (ScrM) are installed on the adapter module or on the CP interface. Up to four screw-in modules can be installed on each adapter module or CP interface.

B&R 2003 expansion modules for the CPU CP476 are screwed onto the module rack instead of the left side section.

2.4.1 Dimensions of the Controllers, CPUs and I/O Modules

These modules are available in single or double widths. The EX270 CAN bus controller is an exception. It is not hung in the module rack, instead it is screwed to the left side of the module rack.

Single width

Diagram 3: Dimensions of the controllers, CPUs and I/O modules, single width


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Double width

The depth remains the same (70 mm) as single width modules.

CAN Bus Controller EX270

Diagram 4: Dimensions of the controllers, CPUs and I/O modules, double width

Diagram 5: CAN Bus Controller EX270



2.4.2 Dimensions of Screw-in Modules

2.4.3 Dimensions of expansion modules for CP476

ME010

Diagram 6: Dimensions of Screw-in Modules

Diagram 7: Dimensions of expansion modules for CP476, ME010


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


ME020

2.5 Installation Dimensions

2.5.1 Horizontal Installation

Note the following dimensions for horizontal installation in a switching cabinet or housing.

There must be at least 30 mm free space above the modules. The cooling vents are not allowed to be covered. Underneath B&R SYSTEM 2003, 35 mm space must be left free for the input, output and supply cables.

Standard Installation

If the controller is installed in the module rack, 22 mm must be added to the width listed in the "Module Racks" section (column "7BP7xx.0").

Installation with CAN Bus Controller EX270

The CAN Bus Controller EX270 is used together with the module racks having model numbers 7BP70x.1. The EX270 is screwed onto the module rack instead of the left side section.

31 mm is to be added to the width listed in the "Module Rack" section (column "7BP70x.1").

Diagram 8: Dimensions of expansion modules for CP476, ME020

Width see Section "Module Rack"

Height h = 115 mm without screw-in modules h = 146 mm with screw-in modules

Table 5: Horizontal Installation



2.5.2 Vertical Installation

Note the following dimensions for vertical installation in a switching cabinet or housing.

At least 30 mm space must be left free on the left side of the module. The cooling vents are not allowed to be covered. On the right hand side of the B&R SYSTEM 2003, 35 mm space must be left free for the input, output and supply cables.The CPU is held in place by two screws to stop it slipping. Before the module rack can be screwed in place, the threaded strips must be pushed in and the left side section and screws for the right side section must be pre-mounted.The modules must be arranged so that the controller is on the lower end of the module rack.

The temperature range is limited to 0 - 50 °C when installing modules vertically.

Standard Installation

If the controller is installed in the module racks, 22 mm must be added to the width listed in the "Module Racks" section (column "7BP7xx.0") when calculating the height.

Installation with CAN Bus Controller EX270

The CAN Bus Controller EX270 is used together with the module racks having model numbers 7BP70x.1. The EX270 is screwed onto the module rack instead of the left side section.To calculate the height, 31 mm is to be added to the width listed in the "Module Rack" section (column "7BP70x.1").

Height see section "Module Rack", column "Width"

Width w = 115 mm without screw-in modules w = 146 mm with screw-in modules

Table 6: Vertical Installation


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


2.6 Installation

The installation is only allowed to be carried out by a qualified personnel!

The B&R SYSTEM 2003 is to be installed in the following order:

• Install mounting rail

• Install the modules on the module rack

• Install the entire unit

2.6.1 Modules

In order to install and fasten the modules on the module rack, you first need to push in the threaded strip and attach the left side section (see following diagram).

• If the threaded strip has not been pre-installed, push it into the aluminum frame:

• Attach the left side section to the aluminum frame using two screws. This side section serves as a stop for the first module.

After these preparations are complete, place the modules on the module rack and push them to the left (connecting the modules) and secure them with fastening screws.

Diagram 9: Inserting the threaded strip in the module rack

Diagram 10: Fasten left side section to the module rack.



• Install the modules on the module rack (the side section which has already been installed, is not shown in the diagram):

• Push the first module to the left until it reaches the side section.

• Each module is fastened to the threaded strip on the module rack using two screws. The angled ground connector should also be mounted on the power supply and connected to the module rack.

• The other modules are installed as described above, pushed to the left and fastened with screws.

Make sure that the modules are pushed together properly so that there is a proper connection between the modules.

• After you have installed and fastened all the modules on the module rack, install the right side section.

Diagram 11: Installing the modules in the module rack

Diagram 12: Push the first module to the left.

Diagram 13: Fasten modules to the module rack


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


2.6.2 Module Rack

The following steps are to be taken to install the module rack on the mounting rail:

• Open both fastening levers (setting: "OPEN")

• Place the module rack in the desired position on the mounting rail

• Close both fastening levers (setting: "CLOSE")

Diagram 14: Fastening lever positions

Diagram 15: Install the module rack on the mounting rail.



2.7 Terminal Block

Single row terminal blocks are used to connect the IO modules. These terminal blocks are ejected using two levers. Pressing the ejection lever (using a screw driver) causes the terminal block to be pushed out of the pin connector so it can be easily removed. They are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps.

2.7.1 Cabling Terminal Blocks

Daisy Chaining

The horizontal arrangement of the terminals allows the supply voltage to be daisy chained:This diagram shows an example of how supply lines can be daisy chained.

Pay attention to the required voltages and currents!

Daisy chaining is only possible if all modules use the same voltage. Additionally, the maximum current load on the connector is not allowed to be exceeded.

2.7.2 Input and Output Connections

The connections for all the inputs and outputs are arranged one on top of the other. This increases clarity on the module and makes it easier to find the correct cable for the corresponding channel during maintenance. Possible exceptions to this rule are listed in the module description.

Diagram 16: Cabling terminal blocks

Diagram 17: Input and output connections


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


2.8 Module Slot Rules

2.8.1 Physical Module Slots

A physical module slot corresponds to the actual space required for a module. 2003 modules can be single width (= one module slot) or double width (= two module slots), for example like the CP474.

Module racks are available in different lengths for the B&R SYSTEM 2003. The palette ranges from one module slot to a max. of 10 module slots.

2.8.2 Logical Module Slots

Some modules require more than one logical module slot. That means the number of physical module slots required is different than the number of logical modules slots required (= module addresses or slots in the hardware tree in Automation Studio™).

The maximum number of logical module slots depends on the controller. The controller also determines how many module slots are available for analog modules (also see section “Modules that use Logical or Analog Module Slots”).

Various controllers are limited as to the maximum number of analog module slots and also as to the module addresses for analog modules. Both conditions must be met.

Attention: A module slot does not correspond to the module address, it only refers to the actual space required on the module rack.

2.8.3 Modules that use Logical or Analog Module Slots

The following table contains an overview of the modules that use two logical module slots or that use an analog module slot.

If a module uses two logical module slots and one of these slots is an analog module slot, it is always the first one. The number of logical module slots corresponds to the module addresses used (= slots in the hardware tree in Automation Studio™).

Controller Maximum Number of Log.

Module Slots 1)

1) Attention: Note power output table!

Maximum Number of

Analog Slots 1)

Possible Module Addresses for

Analog Modules 2)

2) All analog modules and modules with logical analog sections must be operated directly next to the controller, that means they must be inserted to the left of the first digitalmodule. Module slots 1 or 1 + 2 are used by the controllers (exception: EX270 does not require a module slot). The first slot to the right of a controller has module address 1and the module addresses are numbered in increasing order to the right.

CP430 4 2 1 - 4

CP470 / CP770 8 4 1 - 8

CP474 / CP774 12 4 1 - 8

CP476 16 4 1 - 8

EX270 4 2 1 - 2

EX470 / EX770 8 4 1 - 4

EX477 / EX777 8 4 1 - 8

Table 7: Module slots and possible module addresses for controllers.

Module Number of Logical Module Slots Number of Analog Module Slots Number of Phys. Module Slots Used

AF101 1 1 1

DI439 2 --- 1

DM465 2 --- 1

CM211 2 1 1

CM411 2 2 1

Table 8: Modules that use logical or analog module slots



Configuration Examples

Example 1

Configuration with one CP430 and two CM211:

Physical module assignments (physical module slots):

Logical module assignments (module addresses):

Example 2

Configuration with one EX270 and two CM211:

Physical module assignments (physical module slots):

Logical module assignments (module addresses):

Module slot 3 is not allowed to be used for analog modules on the EX270!

Correct Configuration

Diagram 18: Physical module assignments

Correct Configuration

Diagram 19: Logical module assignments

Incorrect Configuration

Diagram 20: Physical module assignments

Incorrect Configuration

Diagram 21: Logical module assignments


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


2.9 Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity

The following values are valid for all B&R SYSTEM 2003 modules if no other values are listed in the “Technical Data” section.

Environmental Temperature during OperationHorizontal InstallationVertical Installation

0 to 60 °C0 to 50 °C

Relative Humidity 5 to 95 %, non-condensing

Table 9: Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity


B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Module Rack

3. Module Rack

3.1 BP70x

3.1.1 Order Data

Technical Data

Module racks with two side sections (7BP7xx.0)

Module racks with one side section (7BP70x.1)

These module racks are, for example, used together with the EX270 CAN bus controller.

Model Number Short Description Image

Module racks with Two Side Sections

7BP702.0 2003 module racks for 2 modules









Module Racks with One Side Section

7BP701.1 2003 module rack for 1 module, incl. right side section

7BP702.1 2003 module rack for 2 modules, incl. right side section

Accessories

7AC010.9 2003 bus cover, 5 pcs.


Table 10: Order data for BP70x module racks

Product ID BP702 BP703 BP704 BP705 BP706 BP707 BP708 BP709 BP710

Number of Module Slots 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Material Aluminum

Fastening the Modules Hang modules in the rack and screw into place (threaded strips in frame)

Mounting the Module Rack Integrated mounting mechanics (standard mounting rail)

Dimensions [mm]HeightWidth 1)

Depth

1) Includes 8.5 mm for two side sections and mounting screws.

115161.5

23

11523823

115314.5

23

11539123

115467.5

23

11554423

115620.5

23

11569723

115773.5

23

Table 11: Technical data for module racks 7Bp7xx.0

Product ID BP701 BP702

Number of Module Slots 1 2

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Material Aluminum

Fastening the Modules Hang modules in the rack and screw into place (threaded strips in frame)

Mounting the Module Rack Integrated mounting mechanics (standard mounting rail)

Dimensions [mm]HeightWidth 1)

Depth

1) Includes 4.5 mm for one side section and mounting screws.

1158123

115157.5

23

Table 12: Technical data for module racks 7BP70x.1


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Module Address

The module address is determined by the controller and the module slot. The CP interface is accessed using module address 0.

Diagram 22: Module Address


B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Bus Controller Modules

4. Bus Controller Modules

4.1 CAN Bus Controller

A CAN bus controller takes over the communication with a PLC, PLC or other CAN capable devices.

Additionally, a CAN bus controller handles the following tasks

• Initialization from power on to active operation on a network

• Evaluating and sending input states

• Sending input states cyclically and/or when the input state changes

• Receiving and switching the outputs

• Defined error behavior for network crashes and local problems

• Setting and changing the operating parameters can be done either with a special instruction which is sent from a CAN client (master) or using configuration memory.

4.2 Remote I/O Bus Controller

A remote I/O bus controller takes over communication between a B&R remote master (B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner) and the B&R 2003 I/O system.

The controller has the following local tasks

• Initialization from power on to active operation on a network

• Evaluating and sending input states (polled by master)

• Receiving and switching the outputs

• Defined error behavior for network crashes and local problems

4.3 Overview

Module Description

EX270 2003 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC, 4 W supply, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, Order TB712 terminal block separately!

EX470 2003 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC, 14.5 W supply, 2 CAN interfaces, electrically isolated, network capable

EX477 2003 remote I/O bus controller, 24 VDC, 14 W supply, 1 electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to remote I/O bus

EX770 2003 CAN bus controller, 100-240 VAC, 14.5 W supply, 2 CAN interfaces, electrically isolated, network capable

EX777 2003 remote I/O bus controller, 100-240 VAC, 14 W supply, 1 electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to remote I/O bus

Table 13: Bus controller module overview


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


4.4 EX270

4.4.1 Order Data

4.4.2 Technical Data


CAN Bus Controller

7EX270.50-1 2003 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC, 4 W supply, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, Order TB712 terminal block separately!

7TB712.9 Terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps

7TB712.91 Terminal block, 12 pin, cage clamps

7TB712:90-02 Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps

7TB712:91-02 Terminal block, 12 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps

Terminal block is not included in the delivery (see "General Accessories").

Additional accessories see sections “Accessories” and “Manuals”.

Table 14: EX270 order data

Product ID EX270

General Information

C-UL-US Listed in preparation

Module Type B&R 2003 Controller

Module Width 20 mm

Installation The controller is screwed onto the module rack instead of the left side plate

Peripherals

Diagnosis LED Yes

I/O Bus Interface 9 pin D-type socket

Number Switch Used to set the node number and baudrate

Standard Communication Interface

Application InterfaceElectrical IsolationDesignMax. DistanceMax. Baudrate

CAN InterfaceYes

12 pin multipoint connector1,000m

500 kBaud

Power Supply

Input VoltageMinimumNominalMaximum

18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

Power Consumption Max. 5 W

Output Power for I/O Modules and Screw-in Modules Max. 4 W

Voltage Monitoring The power supply is only activated starting with an input voltage of approx. +15 V.Therefore the Status LED DC OK is not necessary.

Table 15: EX270 technical data



4.5 EX470 / EX770

4.5.1 Order Data



CAN Bus Controller

7EX470.50-1 2003 CAN bus controller, 24 VDC, 14.5 W supply,2 CAN interfaces, electrically isolated, network capable

7EX770.50-1 2003 CAN bus controller, 100-240 VAC, 14.5 W supply,2 CAN interfaces, electrically isolated, network capable

Accessories

7AC911.9 Bus connector, CAN

0AC912.9 Bus adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface

0AC913.92 Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces,including 30 cm connection cable

7ME770.5 2003 configuration memory for CAN bus controller


Table 16: EX470/EX770 order data

Product ID EX470 EX770

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


Module Width B&R 2003 single width

Module Slot 1

Environmental Temperature during Operation 0 - 60 °C 1) 2)

Peripherals

Diagnosis LEDs Yes


Number Switch Used to set the node number and baudrate

Standard Communication Interfaces

Application Interface IF1Electrical IsolationDesignMax. DistanceMax. Baudrate

CAN interface (left)Yes

9 pin D-type plug1,000 m

500 kBaud


CAN/ID interface (right)Yes

9 pin D-type socket1,000 m

500 kBaud

Power Supply


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

85 VAC100 - 240 VAC

264 VAC

Table 17: EX470/EX770 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Input Voltage Frequency --- 47 to 63 Hz


Output Power for I/O Modules and Screw-in Modules 14.5 W 1) 2)

1) EX470 with revision 30.xx or higher2) EX770 with revision 10.xx or higher


Table 17: EX470/EX770 technical data (cont.)



4.6 EX477 / EX777

4.6.1 Order Data



Remote I/O Bus Controller

7EX477.50-2 2003 Remote I/O Bus Controller, 24 VDC, 14 W supply,1 electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus

7EX777.50-1 2003 Remote I/O Bus Controller, 100-240 VAC, 14 W supply,1 electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus

Accessories

0G1000.00-090 Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS Networks, remote I/O

0AC916.9 Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O,standard mounting rail installation,supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC


Table 18: EX477/EX777 order data


General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


Module Width B&R 2003 single width

Module Slot 1

Peripherals

Diagnosis LEDs Yes


Number Switch Used to set the remote address


Interface TypeDesignElectrical IsolationBaudrates

100 kBit/s181 kBit/s500 kBit/s1000 kBit/s2000 kBit/s

RS4859 pin D-type socket

YesDepends on the distance

Max. 1,200 mMax. 1,000 mMax. 400 mMax. 200 mMax. 100 m

Remote I/O BusAccess ProcedureNumber of SlavesTopologyConnection to the BusTransfer MediaTermination Resistance

Master-slave principleMax. 31 (without repeater)

Physical busDirect

Shielded, twisted pairExternal

Power Supply


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

85 VAC100 - 240 VAC

264 VAC



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Input Voltage Frequency --- 47 to 63 Hz


Output Power for I/O Modules and Screw-in Modules 14 W




B&R SYSTEM 2003 • CPUs

5. CPUs


The CPU is operated on the far left of the module rack. The module has status LEDs and connection plugs for an RS232 and a CAN interface.

The CPUs CP474/CP476/CP774 are equipped with four slots for screw-in modules. The required screw-in modules are inserted into the CP interface and screwed firmly into place.

5.2 RS232 Interface

The RS232 interface is primarily intended for programming the CPU. It can also be used as a general interface (e.g. P121 visualization, printer, bar code reader, etc.).

5.3 CAN Interface

Standard field bus interface for communication with other control systems. Remote I/O expansion using B&R 2003 components and a CAN bus controller, e.g. EX470.

5.4 Local I/O Expansion using B&R 2003 Modules

• Digital I/O (24 VDC or 120/230 VAC)

• Analog I/O (±10 V, 0 - 20 mA, thermocouple, PT100, etc.)

• Incremental encoder or SSI encoder connection (100 kHz, +5 VDC encoder supply)

5.5 Local I/O on the CPU (4 slots)

The CPUs CP474/CP476/CP774 are equipped with four slots for screw-in modules. The following screw-in modules can be inserted:

• Analog I/O modules

• Incremental encoder or SSI encoder connection (B&R 2003)

• Digital I/O (24 VDC technology)

• Additional serial interfaces (max. 3 channels)

5.6 Application Examples

• Counting and measuring digital signals (4 MHz)

• Positioning (analog)

• Stepper motor control

• Drum sequencer

• Pulse width modulated outputs

• Reaction of digital outputs to input events in the µs range


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


5.7 Programming

The CPU is programmed using Automation Studio™ or the PG2000 programming system. Several programming languages are available:

5.8 Backup Battery

Data buffering and nonvolatile operation of the real-time clock are guaranteed by the lithium battery provided.

5.9 Programming the FlashPROM

Programming and deleting the built-in FlashPROM memory takes place using the programming system.

5.10 Legend Sheets

A legend sheet can be slid into the front of the CPUs CP474/CP476/CP774 from above. These sheets can be used for labeling the screw in modules.

5.11 Overview

Automation Studio™ PG2000

Automation Basic (previously PL2000) Instruction List (IL)

ANSI C Ladder Diagram (LAD)

IEC 1131 Ladder Diagram (LAD) PL2000 High Level Language (structured text)

IEC 1131 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)

IEC 1131 Structured Text (ST)

IEC 1131 Instruction List (IL)

Table 20: CPU Programming

Module Description

CP430 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 7 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 64 digital / 32 analog I/O points

CP470 2003 CPU, 350 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 14 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 128 digital / 64 analog I/O points

CP474 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 12.6 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, max. 208 digital / 80 analog I/O points

CP476 2003 CPU, 750 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 12.5 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface,CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, system bus for expansion modules, max. 272 digital / 80 analog I/O points

CP770 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 100-240 VAC, 14 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 128 digital / 64 analog I/O points

CP774 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 100-240 VAC, 12.6 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, max. 208 digital / 80 analog I/O points

Table 21: CPU overview



5.12 CP430 / CP47x / CP77x

5.12.1 Order Data



CPU

7CP430.60-1 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 7 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrical isolation, network capable,max. 64 digital / 32 analog I/O points

CP430, CP470, CP770

CP474, CP774

7CP470.60-2 2003 CPU, 350 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 14 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrical isolation, network capable, max. 128 digital / 64 analog I/O points

7CP474.60-1 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 12.6 W supply, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, max. 208 digital / 80 analog I/O points

7CP770.60-1 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 100-240 VAC, 14 W supply, 1 RS232 interface,1 CAN interface, CAN: electrical isolation, network capable,max. 128 digital / 64 analog I/O points

7CP774.60-1 2003 CPU, 100 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 100-240 VAC, 12.6 W supply, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrical isolation, network capable,4 slots for screw-in modules, max. 208 digital / 80 analog I/O points

Accessories

0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable

0AC201.9 Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell

7AC911.9 Bus Connector, CAN

Backup battery is not included in the delivery.


Table 22: CP430/CP47x/CP77x order data

Product ID CP430 CP470 / CP770 CP474 / CP774

General Information

C-UL-US Listed in preparation Yes Yes

Module Type B&R 2003 CPU B&R 2003 CPU B&R 2003 CPU

Module Width B&R 2003 single width B&R 2003 single width B&R 2003 double width

Module Slot 1 1 1 + 2

Processor Section

Command Cycle Time Average value with 70 % bit and 30 % analog processing

1.6 µs 1.6 µs 0.8 µs

Standard MemoryUser RAMSystem PROMUser PROM

100 KByte SRAM 256 KByte FlashPROM 256 KByte FlashPROM

350 / 100 KByte SRAM 512 / 256 KByte FlashPROM 512 / 256 KByte FlashPROM

100 KByte SRAM 512 KByte FlashPROM 512 KByte FlashPROM

Data BufferingBackup BatteryBuffer Current

Lithium battery 3 V / 950 mAh

TypicalMaximum

1.6 µA60 µA

1.6 µA60 µA

2.2 µA110 µA

HW Watchdog Yes

Table 23: CP430/CP47x/CP77x technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Voltage Monitoring The internal supply is monitored for overvoltage and undervoltage

Peripherals

Real-time ClockResolution

Nonvolatile1 s

Status Display LEDs


Slots for Screw-in ModulesSuitable for IF Modules

No No 41 - 3



RS232No

9 pin D-type plug15 m / 19200 Baud

115.2 kBaud


CANYes


500 kBaud

Power Supply CP430 CP470 / CP474 CP770 / CP774


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

85 VAC100 -240 VAC

264 VAC

Input Voltage Frequency --- --- 47 - 63 Hz

Power Consumption Max. 9.5 W Max. 20 W Max. 20 W

Output Power for I/O Ports 7 W 1) CP470: 14 W 1)

CP474: 12.6 W 1) CP770: 14 W 1)

CP774: 12.6 W 1)

1) Integrated power supply on pin 4 of the RS232 interface for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P120.

Product ID CP430 CP470 / CP770 CP474 / CP774

Table 23: CP430/CP47x/CP77x technical data



5.12.3 General Information

The CPU is operated on the far left of the module rack. The module has status LEDs and connection plugs for an RS232 and a CAN interface.

The CP474/CP774 CPUs are equipped with four slots for screw-in modules. The required screw-in modules are inserted into the CP interface and screwed firmly into place.

The screw-in interface modules can be operated in slots 1, 2 and 3.

5.12.4 Module Overview

The following screw-in modules can be used on the CP interface:

Diagram 23: CP474/CP774 general information

Module Type Description

7AI261.7 Analog IN 1 input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge

7AI294.7 Analog IN 4 inputs for potentiometer displacement gauge

7AI351.70 Analog IN 1 x ±10 V or 1 x 0 - 20 mA (1 x ±20 mA also possible), potentiometer operation

7AI354.70 Analog IN 4 x ±10 V

7AI774.70 Analog IN 4 x 0 - 20 mA (4 x ±20 mA also possible)

7AO352.70 Analog OUT 2 x ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA

7AT324.70 Analog IN 4 x temperature sensor (PT100, PT1000, KTY10 or KTY84)

7AT352.70 Analog IN 2 x PT100 3-line

7AT664.70 Analog IN 4 x thermocouple

7DI135.70 Digital IN 4 x 24 VDC, 50 kHz

7DI138.70 Digital IN 10 x 24 VDC, 2 x event counter operation

7DI140.70 Digital IN 10 x 24 VDC, 2 x event counter / incremental encoder operation

7DO135.70 Digital OUT 4 x 12 - 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 100 kHz

7DO138.70 Digital OUT 8 x 24 VDC, 0.5 A

7DO164.70 Digital OUT 4 x 48 - 125 VAC, 50 mA, zero voltage input

Table 24: Module overview


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


7IF311.7 Interface 1 x RS232

7IF321.7 Interface 1 x RS485/RS422

7IF361.70-1 Interface 1 x PROFIBUS DP Slave

7IF371.70-1 Interface 1 x CAN

7NC161.7 Encoder module 1 x 100 kHz, 5 / 24 VDC


Table 24: Module overview (cont.)



5.13 CP476

5.13.1 Order Data



CPU

7CP476.60-1 2003 CPU, 750 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 24 VDC, 12.5 W supply, 1 RS232, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, 4 slots for screw-in modules, system bus for expansion modules, max. 272 digital / 80 analog I/O points

Accessories




7ME010.9 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot

7ME020.9 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts



Table 25: CP476 order data

Product ID CP476

General Information


Module Type B&R 2003 CPU

Module Width B&R 2003 double width

Module Slot 1 + 2

Processor Section

Additional I/O Processor Handles I/O data points

Instruction Cycle Time (average value for 70 % bit and 30 % analog processing)

0.5 µs

Standard MemoryUser RAMSystem PROMUser PROM

750 KByte SRAM 512 KByte FlashPROM 1.5 MByte FlashPROM

Data BufferingBackup BatteryBuffer Current

TypicalMaximum

Lithium battery 3 V / 950 mAh

2.2 µA110 µA

HW Watchdog Yes

Voltage Monitoring The internal supply is monitored for overvoltage and undervoltage

Peripherals

Real-time Clock Nonvolatile

Resolution 1 s

Status Display LEDs

I/O Bus Interface (right side) 9 pin D-type socket

System Bus for Expansions(left side)

PCMCIA memory card ME010 B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module insert ME020

Slots for Screw-in Modules Suitable for IF Modules

4 1 - 3

StandardCommunication Interfaces


RS232No


115.2 kBaud

Table 26: CP476 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003



With the addition of the CP476, the B&R SYSTEMS 2003 now has a CPU with outstanding technical properties.

Features

• 750 KByte User SRAM

• 1.5 MByte User FlashPROM

• Additional I/O processor

• System bus for expansions

• CP interface with four slots

• Two node number switches

Memory capacity was increased to meet the requirements of our customers.

The CP476 extends the CPU performance spectrum for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 at the top end. Compared to the CP474, the new CPU increases performance by at least a 50 % because the clock frequency is 50 % higher and the integration of an additional I/O processor. This reduces the interrupt load considerably and decreases the analog update time on the left side by up to a factor of 2 (screw-in modules 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 are processed parallel to each other). The I/O update on the left side tales place independently of the right side.

The CPU CP476 is equipped with a system bus for expansions. The following expansions can be used:

• ME010 expansion module for PCMCIA memory cards

• ME020 expansion module for PCMCIA memory cards and a slot for B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts

Two CAN node number switches guarantee that an offset no longer has to be set. The actual node number always corresponds to the switch setting.

5.13.4 CP Interface

The CPU is equipped with four slots for screw-in modules. The required screw-in modules are inserted into the CP interface and screwed firmly into place.

To reduce the load on the CPU, an additional I/O processor handles operation of the all I/O data points on the CP interface and the I/O bus interface (right side).

The I/O processor handles slots 1 and 3 as well as 2 and 4 in succession (multiplex operation). That means slots 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 are operated parallel to each other.


CANYes


500 kBaud

Power Supply


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Output Power for I/O Ports 12.5 W 1)

1) Integrated power supply on pin 4 of the RS232 interface for simple PANELWARE controllers, e.g. P120.

Product ID CP476

Table 26: CP476 technical data (cont.)



The screw-in interface modules can be operated in slots 1, 2 and 3.

5.13.5 Module Overview

The following screw-in modules can be used on the CP interface:

Diagram 24: CP Interface

















7IF311.7 Interface 1 x RS232

7IF321.7 Interface 1 x RS485/RS422

7IF361.70-1 Interface 1 x PROFIBUS DP Slave

7IF371.70-1 Interface 1 x CAN


Table 27: Module overview


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Program Memory Modules


6.1 Overview

Module Description

ME770 2003 configuration memory for CAN bus controller

Table 28: Application memory modules overview



6.2 ME770

6.2.1 Order Data


6.2.3 Description

All operating parameters for a node are stored in nonvolatile configuration memory. When switched on, the node is initialized with the parameters in the configuration memory.

Data is taken from configuration memory if,

a) the node number set on the module corresponds to the one stored, or

b) the node number on the module is set to 0.


7ME770.5 2003 configuration memory for CAN bus controller

Also see section "Bus Controller Modules EX470/EX770".

Table 29: ME770 order data

Product ID ME770

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Memory Type 4 KBit S-EEPROM

ProgrammingME770Programmed using

Must be connected to CAN bus controllerCAN Library for PG2000, CAN Configurator

Interface Connection 9 pin D-type plug

Power Consumption 0.1 W

Table 30: ME770 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Analog Interface (AF) Module

7. Analog Interface (AF) Module


Screw-in modules are installed either on the CP interface or on the adapter module and then screwed into place:

7.2 Overview

7.3 Module Overview

The following screw-in modules can be used on the AF101 adapter module:

Diagram 25: Analog interface (AF) module general information

Module Description

AF101 2003 adapter module, 4 slots for screw-in modules

Table 31: Analog interface (AF) module overview











Table 32: Analog interface (AF) module overview











Table 32: Analog interface (AF) module overview (cont.)


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


7.4 AF101

7.4.1 Order Data



7AF101.7 2003 adapter module, 4 slots for screw-in modules

Table 33: AF101 order data

Product ID AF101

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

AmountCP430, EX270

CP470, CP770CP474, CP476, CP774EX470, EX770EX477, EX777

2

4

Adapter Interface 4 slots for screw-in modules

Electrical Isolation No

Status LEDs For each channel

Power Consumption Max. 0.3 W

Mechanical Characteristics

Dimensions B&R 2003 single width

Table 34: Analog interface (AF) module technical data


B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Digital Input Modules

8. Digital Input Modules


Digital input modules convert binary process signals into the internal signal level required by the PLC. The states of the digital inputs are shown with status LEDs. The distinguishing features relevant for the input modules are:

• Number of inputs

• Input voltage

• Input delay (filter)

• Special functions (e.g. counter inputs)

8.2 Input Filter

An input filter is available for each input. The input delay is shown in the technical data sections. Disturbance pulses which are shorter than input delay are suppressed by the input filter.

8.3 Screw-in Module Overview

Diagram 26: Digital input modules

Module DI135

Number of Inputs 4

Nominal Input Voltage 24 VDC

Input FrequencyIncremental Encoder OperationEvent Counter Operation

50 kHz 100 kHz

Number of Outputs 1

Nominal Switching Voltage 24 VDC

Continuous Current 0.5 A

Switching Frequency Max. 20 kHz with resistive load

Table 35: DI135 overview

Module DI138 DI140

Number of Inputs 10 10

Nominal Input Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC

Input Delay 1.3 ms 1.3 ms

Incremental EncoderAmountInput FrequencyEvaluation

---1

50 kHz 4-fold

Event CounterAmountInput FrequencyCount Frequency

220 kHz 40 kHz

250 kHz

100 kHz

Table 36: DI138 / DI140 overview


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


8.4 I/O Module Overview

Module DI435 DI439.7 DI439.72 DI645

Number of Inputs 8 16 16 8

Input Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 100 - 240 VAC

Input Delay 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 50 ms

Remarks Conn.: Pin connector Conn.: D-type plug

Table 37: I/O module overview



8.5 DI135

8.5.1 Order Data



7DI135.70 2003 digital input module, 4 inputs 24 VDC, sink,incremental encoder operation: 50 kHz, event counter operation: 100 kHz, 1 comparator output 24 VDC, screw-in module, Order terminal block TB712 separately!






Table 38: DI135 order data

Product ID DI135

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2003 screw-in module

Slot AF101 adapter module, CP interface Power Panel interface


Inputs

Number of Inputs 4

Wiring Sink


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

Input FrequencyIncremental Encoder OperationEvent Counter

50 kHz 100 kHz

Switching ThresholdLOWHIGH

<5 V>15 V

Input Delay Max. 3 µs (at 18 - 30 V)

Input Current at Nominal Voltage 8 mA

Electrical Isolation Input - PLC

Incremental Encoder

Signal Form Square wave pulse

Evaluation 4-fold

Input Frequency 50 kHz

Count Frequency 200 kHz

Phase Offset between Channel A and B 90° ±25°

Counter Size 32 Bit

InputsInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4

Channel AChannel B

Reference Pulse RReference enable switch ENR

Event Counter



Counter Size 2 x 16 Bit

Table 39: DI135 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003



The DI135 screw-in module can be used for the following tasks:

Counting and measuring digital signals (internal measuring frequency 4 MHz)

• Gate measurement

• Frequency measurement

• Event counting

• Incremental encoder operation

• Reaction to input events in the µs range

• Local counter status monitoring with direct output control

InputsInput 1Input 2

Counter 1Counter 2

Outputs

Number of Outputs 1

Operating VoltageMinimumNominalMaximum

18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Maximum Switching Frequency 20 kHz with resistive load

Braking Voltage 45 V to 55 V

Diagnosis Reverse polarity protection, short-circuit protection, software monitors status

Electrical Isolation Output - PLC


Dimensions B&R 2003 screw-in module

Product ID DI135

Table 39: DI135 technical data (cont.)



8.6 DI138

8.6.1 Order Data



7DI138.70 2003 digital input module, 10 inputs 24 VDC, sink,2 inputs for event counter operation, input frequency 20 kHz, screw-in module, Order terminal block TB712 separately!







Product ID DI138

General Information


Module Type B&R SYSTEM 2003 screw-in module

Slot AF101 adapter module, CP interface, Power Panel interface


Inputs

Number of Inputs 10

Design IEC1131 - Type 1


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V

Input Current

Inputs 5 and 6 8 mA @ 24 VDC

Other Inputs 5 mA @ 24 VDC

Input DelayInputs 5 and 6Other Inputs

Max. 3 µs Max. 1.3 ms


Event Counter




Counter Size 16 Bit


Counter 1Counter 2


Dimensions B&R SYSTEM 2003 screw-in module



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003



The DI138 digital input module is a screw-in module for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 and for the B&R Power Panel. It has 10 inputs for 24 VDC, two of which are equipped with counter functions. The module is also equipped with supply voltage monitoring.



8.7 DI140

8.7.1 Order Data



7DI140.70 2003 digital input module, 10 inputs 24 VDC, sink,2 inputs for event counter operation or for direction dependant position evaluation, input frequency 50 kHz, 4 inputs can be used as high speed inputs (e.g. gate, frequency measurement), screw-in module, Order terminal block TB712 separately!







Product ID DI140

General Information





Inputs

Number of Inputs 10

Design IEC1131 - Type 1


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V

Input Current 8 mA @ 24 VDC

Input DelayInputs 8, 9, 10Other Inputs

Max. 1.3 msMax. 3 µs


Incremental Encoder


Evaluation 4-fold



Counter Size 32 Bit

InputsInput 5Input 6Input 7

Channel AChannel B

Reference Pulse R

Input 8 Reference Enable Switch

Event Counter






Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003



The DI140 digital input module is a screw-in module for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 and for the B&R Power Panel. It has 10 inputs for 24 VDC, four of which are equipped with counter functions. There are two types of operation, event counter and encoder operation. The DI140 provides TPU functionality. The module is also equipped with supply voltage monitoring.

Counter Size 32 Bit


Counter 1Counter 2



Product ID DI140




8.8 DI435

8.8.1 Order Data



7DI435.7 2003 digital input module, 8 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, Order terminal blocks separately!





Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "General Accessories").


Product ID DI435

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

AmountCP430, EX270

CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777

4

8

Static Characteristics

Module Type B&R 2003 I/O module

Number of Inputs 8

Wiring Sink or source


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V

Input Delay Max. 1 ms (at 18 - 30 V)

Input Current at Nominal Voltage Approx. 8 mA (sink/source)

Voltage Monitoring (LED: U OK) Yes, supply voltage >18 V


Operating Characteristics






Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


8.9 DI439.7

8.9.1 Order Data



7DI439.7 2003 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, Order terminal blocks separately!






Table 46: DI439.7 order data

Product ID DI439.7

General Information


Amount 1)

CP430, EX270

CP470, CP770, EX470, EX770EX477, EX777

CP474, CP774

CP476

2

4

6

8



Number of Inputs 16



18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V






Table 47: DI439.7 technical data






1) Two logical module slots are required by the module.

Product ID DI439.7



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


8.10 DI439.72

8.10.1 Order Data



7DI439.72 2003 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 2 electrically isolated input groups

Connection made using D-type connector.

Table 48: DI439.72 order data

Product ID DI439.72

General Information


Amount 1)

CP430, EX270

CP470, CP770, EX470, EX770EX477, EX777,

CP474, CP774

CP476

2

4

6

8



Number of InputsTotalin 2 Groups of

168



18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V









Electrical IsolationInput - PLCGroup - Group

YesYes




Product ID DI439.72

Table 49: DI439.7 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


8.11 DI645

8.11.1 Order Data



7DI645.7 2003 digital input module, 8 inputs 100-240 VAC, 50 ms, Order terminal blocks separately!







Product ID DI645

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

AmountCP430, EX270


4

8



Number of Inputs 8



85 VAC100 - 240 VAC

264 VAC

Input Voltage Frequency 47 - 63 Hz


<40 VAC at 2 mA>79 VAC

Input Delay Max. 50 ms (at 85 - 264 VAC)

Input Current100 VAC / 60 Hz240 VAC / 50 Hz

Approx. 5 mAApprox. 11 mA

Voltage Monitoring (LED: U OK) Yes, supply voltage >85 VAC








B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Digital Output Modules

9. Digital Output Modules


Digital output modules are used for controlling external loads (relays, motors, solenoid). The states of the digital outputs are indicated by status LEDs. The distinguishing features relevant for output modules are:

• Number of outputs

• Type (relay, transistors)

• Switching voltage

• Continuous current

9.2 Protective Circuit

The transistor output module DO435 has overload protection and an internal protective circuit for overload peaks or reverse polarity. The braking voltage allows fast switching of inductive loads without inverse diodes.

The relay output module DO720 requires external overload protection (fuse).

On the relay output module DO721, each output is protected against overload by a fuse.

9.3 Screw-in Module Overview

9.4 I/O Module Overview

Module DO135 DO138 DO164

Number of Outputs 4 8 4

Design FET FET Triac Coupler

Type Push/Pull switch Positive switching ---

Switching VoltageMinimumNominalMaximum

11.4 VDC12 - 24 VDC

30 VDC

10.5 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

48 - 125 VAC

Continuous Current per OutputModule

Max. 0.1 AMax. 0.4 A

Max. 0.5 AMax. 2 A

Max. 0.05 AMax. 0.2 A

Ignition Pulse Current --- --- Max. 0.5 A

Switching Frequency Max. 100 kHz Max. 100 Hz 96 - 126 Hz

Table 52: Screw-in module overview

Module DO435 DO720 DO721 DO722

Number of Outputs Max. 8 8 4 8

Design FET Relay Relay Relay

Type Normally open Change-over contact Normally open


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

240 VAC / 30 VDC264 VAC / 110 VDC

240 VAC / 24 VDC264 VAC / 125 VDC

240 VAC / 24 VDC264 VAC / 125 VDC


Max. 2 AMax. 8 A

Max. 2 AMax. 12 A

Max. 4 AMax. 16 A

Max. 2.5 AMax. 20 A

Table 53: I/O module overview


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


9.5 DO135

9.5.1 Order Data



7DO135.70 2003 digital output module, 4 FET outputs 12 to 24 VDC,0.1 A, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!






Table 54: DO135 order data

Product ID DO135

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Outputs 4

Design FET

Type Push/Pull switch

Switching Voltage/SupplyMinimumNominalMaximum

Protection

11.4 VDC12 - 24 VDC

30 VDCReverse polarity protection


Max. 0.1 AMax. 0.4 A

Maximum Switching Frequency 100 kHz

Residual Voltage Max. 0.6 V at 0.1 A

Capacitive Load Max. 20 nF, an overcurrent warning is given when switching large capacitive loads


Protection Characteristics

ProtectionShort Circuit ProtectionOverload Protection

YesYes

Short Circuit Current 0.11 - 0.3 A

Diagnosis Status for SW EvaluationOvervoltage

UndervoltageOvercurrent Monitoring

Us >30 VDC a voltage >35 VDC for t >5 ms will damage the outputs

Us <10.5 VDCFunctions with a duty cycle of at least 10 µs

Table 55: DO135 technical data




The DO135 is a 4 channel output module. The operating mode can be set separately for each output. The following operating modes are available:

• Normal operation

• Pulse width modulation (PWM)

• TPU operation

Normal Operation

The outputs are switched on/off.

Pulse Width Modulation

Output are switched on/off periodically. Pulse width ratio, period duration and resolution can be set.

TPU Operation

In TPU operation, the outputs are controlled by the TPU. If, for example, the DO135 module is inserted in the first slot of the CP interface, the first output can be operated using the LTX function LTXdo0().

9.5.4 Special Functions

• The supply voltage is tested over a valid range (10.5 VDC < Us < 30 VDC)

• The channels are equipped with a readable power cut-off.

Dynamic Characteristics

Switching DelayTypicalMaximum

<2 µs2.4 µs


Electrical IsolationOutput - PLCOutput - Output

NoNo



Diagram 27: Pulse width modulation

Product ID DO135

Table 55: DO135 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


9.6 DO138

9.6.1 Order Data



7DO138.70 2003 digital output module, 8 outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, short circuit protection, thermal overload protection, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!







Product ID DO138

General Information





Number of Outputs 8

Type FET positive switching


YesNo




Max. 0.5 AMax. 2A

To increase the output current, outputs can be switched in parallel.

Leakage Current when Switched Off 12 µA

Residual Voltage 0.2 V @ 0.5 A

Continuous Short Circuit Current Typ. 4 A

Switching On after Overload Cutoff Automatically within seconds (depends on the module temperature)

Power ConsumptionInternal24 VDC Supply

0.25 W1.5 W

Protection Thermal cutoffIntegrated protection for switching inductances

Reverse polarity protection


Switching Delaylog. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0

Max. 450 msMax. 450 ms

Switching FrequencyResistive Load Max. 100 Hz

Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads

47 VDC







The DO138 digital output module is a screw-in module for the B&R SYSTEM 2003 and for the B&R Power Panel with 8 outputs. Channels 0 to 3 can also be used by TPU (note max. switching frequency).


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


9.7 DO164

9.7.1 Order Data



7DO164.70 2003 digital output module, 4 FET outputs48 to 125 VAC, 0.05 A, zero cross detection, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!







Product ID DO164

General Information


Slot AF101 adapter module, CP interface


Zero Voltage Input (connection pins 11 and 12)

Number of Inputs 1

Rated Voltage 48 to 125 VAC

Rated Frequency 48 to 63 Hz

Input Impedance in Signal Range 1 MΩ symmetric, 500 kΩ to GND

Switching ThresholdLow RangeHigh Range

<-5 V>+5 V

Switching Hysteresis 0.2 V

Tolerance of the Zero Cross Signalat 48 to 125 VAC

0 to 100 µs


Triac Outputs

Number of Outputs 4

Type of Outputs 1) Triac coupler, only to control power triacs or nonparallel thyristors

Rated Voltage 48 to 125 VAC

Rated Frequency 48 to 63 Hz

Output CurrentContinuous CurrentIgnition Pulse Current

Max. 50 mA Max. 0.5 A

Residual Voltage Max. 2.5 V at 50 mA

Holding Current Max. 3.5 mA

Leakage Current (0 signal) Max. 1 µA





The screw-in module DO164 is equipped with four output channels. It is used to send ignition pulses (triac coupler) for phase-angle control of power triacs.

The module is installed on the adapter module or on the CP interface.

Critical Rate of Rise of Commutating Voltagewhen Switched Off

>500 V/µs

Drive Pulse Duration TDP (TPU outputs) >250 µs


Product ID DO164


Protection No short circuit protection

Type of External Protective CircuitRC CombinationGate Resistance

Reduced dV/dtIncreased immunity to disturbances


Delay 0 to 1 Max. 200 µs



Electrical IsolationInput - OutputOutput - Output

YesYes

Recommended Cable Types Twisted pair cabling to the terminal pairs

Line Length to Power Triac Max. 10 m



1) Because of the very low (dV/dt)c value of the triac coupler ("Critical Rate of Rise of Commutating Voltage"), the triac output is not suitable for use as SSR relay for direct switchingof loads.

Product ID DO164



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


9.8 DO435

9.8.1 Order Data



7DO435.7 2003 digital output module, 8 FET outputs 24 VDC, 2 A, each output can be optionally used as an input, Order terminal blocks separately!







Product ID DO435

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2003 I/O module, single width

AmountCP430, EX270


4

8



Outputs

Number of Outputs Max. 8

Type FET


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Max. 2 AMax. 8 A

Simultaneousnessat 1 Aat 2 A

100 %50 % (note derating curve)

Residual Voltage Max. 1 V at 2 A

ProtectionShort Circuit ProtectionOverload Protection

YesYes

Short Circuit Current at 24 V Approx. 20 A until switched off

Braking Voltage when Switching OffInductive Loads

Approx. 46 V




With this module, each channel can be used either as an input or output. All outputs must first be declared as such. Each time the module is turned on, all channels are configured as inputs.

Technical Data for the Inputs


Approx. 200 µsTyp. 50 µs / max. 250 µs

Typ. 170 µs / max. 250 µs

Max. Switching FrequencyResistive LoadInductive Load

100 Hzsee "Switching Inductive Loads"


Product ID DO435

Number of Inputs Max. 8

Wiring Sink


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V


Input Current at Nominal Voltage Approx. 6 mA


Table 62: Technical Data for the Inputs

Product ID DO435



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


9.9 DO720

9.9.1 Order Data


Order Data Model Number Short Description Image

7DO720.7 2003 digital output module, 8 relay outputs240 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A, Order terminal blocks separately!







Product ID DO720

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

AmountEX270

CP430


2

4

8



Number of Outputs 8

Type Relay / N.O.

Switching VoltageNominalMaximum

240 VAC / 30 VDC264 VAC / 110 VDC


2 A12 A

Contact Resistance 30 mΩ at 6 VDC, 1 A

Maximum Switching Power (AC) 480 VA

Maximum Switching Power (DC) 60 W



Short Circuit Protection Fuse 16 AT (common connection)





Switching Delaylog 0 - log 1log 1 - log 0




Dielectric StrengthContact - ContactContact - Coil

750 VAC / 1 min2000 VAC / 1 min



Product ID DO720



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


9.10 DO721

9.10.1 Order Data



7DO721.7 2003 digital output module, 4 relay outputs240 VAC / 24 VDC, 4 A

7AC011.9 2003 stress relief attachment, 5 pcs., incl. mounting material

Terminal blocks are included in the delivery.


Product ID DO721

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

AmountEX270

CP430


2

4

8



Number of Outputs 4 isolated channels

Type Relay / Changeover

Switching VoltageNominal at 4 AMaximumMaximum Voltage Relay - Relay

240 VAC / 24 VDC264 VAC / 125 VDC

460 VAC


4 A16 A

Starting Current 15 A / 200 ms

Contact Resistance 100 mΩ at 6 VDC, 100 mA


Maximum Switching Power (DC) 120 W at 30 VDC



Short Circuit Protection Fuse T 5A H / 250 V per output





Switching Delaylog 0 - log 1log 1 - log 0



Electrical Isolation Output - PLC, Output - Output

Dielectric StrengthContact - ContactContact - PLCRelay - Relay

1.4 kV with 1.2 x 50 µs pulse4 kV with 1.2 x 50 µs pulse4 kV with 1.2 x 50 µs pulse



Product ID DO721



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


9.11 DO722

9.11.1 Order Data



7DO722.7 2003 digital output module, 8 relay outputs240 VAC / 24 VDC, 2.5 A


0AC171.9 Glass tube fuses 5 x 20 mm, 20 pcs., 3.15 A T / 250 V

Terminal blocks are included in the delivery.


Product ID DO722

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Amount

EX270

CP430


2

4

8


Module Type B&R 2003 I/O Module

Number of Outputs 8 isolated channels

Type Relay / N.O.

Switching VoltageNominal at 2.5 AMaximumMaximum Voltage Relay - Relay

240 VAC / 24 VDC264 VAC / 125 VDC

460 VAC


2.5 A20 A


Maximum Switching Power (DC) 75 W at 30 VDC



Short Circuit Protection Fuse T 3.15A H / 250 V per output


Output Delay for Signal Changes from

log 0 - log 1log 1 - log 0







YesYes



Product ID DO722



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Digital Mixed Modules

10. Digital Mixed Modules


Digital mixed modules are a combination of digital input and output modules. The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status LEDs.

10.2 Overview

Module DM435 DM438 DM465

Number of Inputs 8 8 16

Nom. Input Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC


Nom. Switching Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Continuous Current 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A

Connection Terminal block D-type connector Terminal block

Table 69: Digital Mixed Module Overview



10.3 DM435

10.3.1 Order Data



7DM435.7 2003 digital mixed module, 8 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 8 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, Order terminal blocks separately!





7TB722.9 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, screw clamps

7TB722.91 2003 terminal block, 22 pin, cage clamps



Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "Accessories" and "General Accessories").

Table 70: DM435 order data

Product ID DM435

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


Amount

CP430, EX270


4

8

Voltage and Output Monitoring (LED: OK) YesSupply voltage >18 V, outputs OK


Inputs

Number of Inputs 8



18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V

Input Delay Max. 1 ms



Outputs

Number of Outputs 8

Type Highside Driver IC (Transistor)

Table 71: DM438 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003



18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Max. 0.5 AMax. 4 A


Overload Protection Yes


Internal Protective Circuit Yes

Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads 47 V


Max. 450 µs Max. 450 µs




Product ID DM435

Table 71: DM438 technical data (cont.)



10.4 DM438

10.4.1 Order Data



7DM438.72 2003 digital mixed module, 8 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source, 8 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A



Product ID DM438

General Information



Amount

CP430, EX270

CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774EX470, EX770. EX477, EX777

4

8

Voltage and Output Monitoring (LED: OK)

YesSupply voltage >18 V, outputs OK


Inputs

Number of Inputs 8



18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V




Outputs

Number of Outputs 8




Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003



18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Max. 0.5 AMax. 4 A





Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads

47 V






Product ID DM438




10.5 DM465

10.5.1 Order Data



7DM465.7 2003 digital mixed module, 16 inputs 24 VDC,1 ms, sink, 16 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A,Order terminal blocks separately!












Product ID DM465

General Information



Amount 1)

CP430, EX270

CP470, CP770EX470, EX770, EX477, EX777

CP474, CP774

CP476

2

4

6

8

Voltage andOutput Monitoring

Yes (LED: OK)Supply voltage >18 V, outputs OK


Inputs

Number of Inputs 16

Wiring Sink


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


<5 V>15 V



Electrical IsolationInput - PLCInput - Output

YesNo



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Outputs

Number of Outputs 16



18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Max. 0.5 AMax. 8 A



Switching On after Overload Cutoff Automatically within seconds (depends on the module temperature)






Electrical IsolationOutput - PLCOutput - Input

YesNo




Product ID DM465



B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Analog Input Modules

11. Analog Input Modules


Measured values (voltages, currents) are converted into numerical values which can be processed by the PLC using analog input modules.

In the PLC, analog data is always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. In this way, the resolution (number of steps) of the input module does not have to be considered when creating the application program.

Each analog input module is assigned a status LED on the analog adapter module or CP interface. This LED indicates that the input module is working.

11.2 Overview

Module AI261 AI294

Number of Channels 1 4

Input Signal ±1 to ±16 mV/V 0 to 4.5 V

Digital Converter Resolution 24 bit 13 bit

Remark One input used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge Four inputs for potentiometer evaluation (e.g. displacement gauge)

Table 76: Analog input module overview

Module AI351 AI354 AI774

Number of Channels 1 4 4

Input Signal ±10 V or 0 - 20 mA ±10 V 0 - 20 mA

Digital Converter Resolution 12 Bit + sign 12 Bit + sign 12 Bit



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


11.3 AI261

11.3.1 Order Data



7AI261.7 2003 analog input module, 1 input for evaluation of a full-bridge strain gauge, 24 bit, screw-in module

Table 78: AI261 order data

Product ID AI261

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 1

Digital Converter Resolution 24 Bit

Measured Value PreparationCalibrationLinearizationConversion

Using software, also during operationy = k * x + d

To physical units (32 bit representation)

Measurement Range ±1 to ±16 mV/V, Set using software

Input Current <140 nA

Operating Range / Measurement Sensor 75 to 5000 Ω

Bridge VoltageShort Circuit and Overload ProtectionConnection

4.5 VDC ±3 % / max. 60 mAYes

4-line connection

Sensor Type Isolated

Internal Power Consumption Max. 0.6 W


Isolation Voltage under NormalOperating Conditions between Channel and Bus

No electrical isolation



Table 79: AI261 technical data




A full-bridge strain gauge can be used for the following tasks:

• Force gauge

• Elasticity gauge

• Load cell

• Pressure gauge

• Strain gauge

• Torque meter


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


11.4 AI294

11.4.1 Order Data



7AI294.7 2003 analog input module, 4 inputs, potentiometer displacement gauge, 13 bit, screw-in module


Product ID AI294

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 4


Potentiometer Supply Upot +4.5 V ±3 % at 40 mA

Short Circuit and Overload Protection Yes

Input Current <0.2 µA

Measurement Sensor 0.5 to 10 kΩ, Potentiometer

Measurement Range 0 V to Upot

Sensor Type Isolated

Internal Power Consumption Max. 0.5 W


Isolation Voltage under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus

No electrical isolation






11.5 AI351

11.5.1 Order Data



7AI351.70 2003 analog input module,1 input, +/- 10 V or 0 to 20 mA, 12 Bit + sign, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!







Product ID AI351

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 1 differential input

Input SignalCurrentVoltage

Can be set using switch0 - 20 mA (also ±20 mA)

±10 V

Potentiometer Voltage ±9.94 V at max. 10 mA

Digital Converter Resolution 12 Bit + sign

Differential Input ResistanceVoltageCurrent (load)

20 MΩ130 - 200 Ω

Power ConsumptionCurrent/Voltage MeasurementPotentiometer Operation

Max. 0.3 WMax. 0.7 W


Electrical IsolationInput - PLC No





Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


11.6 AI354

11.6.1 Order Data



7AI354.70 2003 analog input module, 4 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit + sign, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!







Product ID AI354

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 4 differential inputs

Input Signal ±10 V

Digital Converter Resolution 12 Bit + sign

Differential Input Resistance 20 MΩ



Electrical IsolationInput - PLCInput - Input

NoNo






11.7 AI774

11.7.1 Order Data



7AI774.70 2003 analog input module, 4 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!







Product ID AI774

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 4 differential inputs

Input Signal 0 - 20 mA (also ±20 mA)


Differential Input Resistance (load) 130 - 200 Ω




NoNo





Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Analog Output Modules

12. Analog Output Modules


Analog output modules convert PLC internal number values into voltages or currents. The numbers to be converted must be in 16 bit 2s complement. The conversion takes place independent of the resolution of the output module used.

Each analog output module is assigned a status LED on the analog adapter module or CP interface. This LED indicates that the output module is working.

12.1.1 Overview

Module AO352

Number of Outputs 2

Output Signal ±10 V or 0 - 20 mA


Table 88: Analog Output Module Overview



12.2 AO352

12.2.1 Order Data



7AO352.70 2003 analog output module, 2 outputs, +/- 10 V or 0-20 mA, 12 bit, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!






Table 89: AO352 order data

Product ID AO352

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Outputs 2

Output SignalCurrentVoltage

Can be set for each channel using a switch0 - 20 mA

±10 V


Short Circuit Protection Yes


Current Output

Load Max. 400 Ω

LSB Value (12 Bit) 5.16 µA ±2.4 % / LSB

Voltage Output

Load Max. 10 mA

LSB Value (12 Bit) 5.15 mV ±0.8 % / LSB



NoNo



Table 90: AO352 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Temperature Modules

13. Temperature Modules


Temperature measurement values are converted into number values which can be processed by the PLC using temperature modules.

In the PLC, the number values are always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. In this way, the resolution (number of steps) of the temperature module does not have to be considered when creating the application program.

For temperature measurements, the temperature module returns the measured value in 0.1 ° steps. That means a result of 750 corresponds to 75.0 °C. The data format 0.1 °C is supported by all temperature modules as standard. Additionally, a higher resolution can also be set for some temperature modules.

Each temperature module is assigned a status LED on the analog adapter module or CP interface. This LED indicates that the temperature module is working.

13.2 Overview

Module AT324 AT352 AT664


Measurement Range -200 to +850 °C -200 to +850 °C -270 to +1,372 °C

Sensor KTY10-6KTY84-130

PT100PT1000

PT100 FeCuNi Type JNiCrN Type KPtRhPt Type S

Raw Value Evaluation Yes No Yes

Digital Converter Resolution 16 Bit 16 Bit 16 Bit

Table 91: Temperature Module Overview



13.3 AT324

13.3.1 Order Data



7AT324.70 2003 analog input module, 4 temperature inputs (2-line connection), KTY10 -50 to +150 degrees C, KTY84 -40 to +300 degrees C, PT100 -200 to +850 degrees C, PT1000 -200 to +850 degrees C, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!






Table 92: AT324 order data

Product ID AT324

General Information





Input Type Resistance measurement using 2-line procedure with constant current feed

Number of Inputs 4

SensorKTY10-6KTY84-130PT100PT1000

-50 °C to +150 °C-40 °C to +300 °C

-200 °C to +850 °C-200 °C to +850 °C

Wiring 2-line

Conversion Method Sigma Delta


Input AmplificationG = 1G = 2

Can be set for each channel using softwareKTY10-6, KTY84-130, PT1000

PT100

Reference 5 kΩ ±0.1 %

Measurement Current 200 µA ±5.22 %

Resistance Measurement Rangewhen G = 1when G = 2

1 to 4995 Ω1 to 2497.5 Ω

Conversion Time per ChannelInput Amplification

UniformDifferent

60 ms190 ms

Table 93: AT324 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003



The screw-in module AT324 is equipped with four input channels. It is used to evaluate measured values for PT100, PT1000, KTY10-6 and KTY84-130 temperature sensors.

The module is installed on the adapter module AF101 or on the CP interface.

Resolution in °CKTY10-6KTY84-130PT100PT1000

1 LSB = 0.01 °C1 LSB = 0.03 °C1 LSB = 0.15 °C1 LSB = 0.03 °C

Resolution in Ωwhen G = 1when G = 2

1 LSB = 76.29395 mΩ ±0.1 %1 LSB = 38.14697 mΩ ±0.1 %

Data Format INT16

StandardizationKTY10-6KTY84-130PT100PT1000

Can be set per channel-50.00 °C to +150.00 °C-40.00 °C to +300.00 °C-200.0 °C to +850.0 °C-200.0 °C to +850.0 °C

Standardized Value Range for Resistance Measurement

when G = 1when G = 2

Can be set per channel0.1 Ω to 5000.0 Ω

0.05 Ω to 5000.0 Ω

Measurement Range MonitoringOpen InputsBroken ConnectionRange Exceeded (neg.) 1)

Range Exceeded (pos.)General Error

$7FFF$7FFF$8001$7FFF$8000

Common Mode RejectionDC50 Hz

>90 dB>150 dB

Cross-talk between Channels Typ. 100 dB



Input FilterTypeCut-off Frequency

Low pass 1st order150 Hz



NoNo



1) Only when measuring with a temperature sensor.

Product ID AT324

Table 93: AT324 technical data (cont.)



13.4 AT352

13.4.1 Order Data



7AT352.70 2003 analog input module, 2 inputs, PT100 (3-line connection), -200 to +850 °C, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!







Product ID AT352

General Information





Number of Inputs 2

SensorTypeConnectionStandard

PT1003-Line Connection

IEC/EN 60751


Measurement Range

Small Measurement RangeResolution

Large Measurement RangeResolution

2 ranges can be set

-200.00 to +327.67 °C0.01 °C

-200.0 to +850.0 °C0.1 °C

Measurement Update 20 or 16.67 ms

Conversion of Measurement Values toTemperature Values

Automatic in the module

Measurement Current 2 mA




NoNo





Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


13.5 AT664

13.5.1 Order Data



7AT664.70 2003 analog input module, 4 inputs, thermocouple,-270 to +1372 degrees C, screw-in module, Order TB712 terminal block separately!







Product ID AT664

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 4

Sensor Thermocouples


Measurement RangeSensor Temperature

FeCuNi: Type JNiCrNi: Type KPtRhPt: Type S

Terminal TemperatureRaw Value

Depends on sensor type 1)

-210 to +1,200 °C-270 to +1,372 °C-50 to +1,768 °C-55 to +125 °C

±65534 µV

1) Can be configured using software.

ResolutionSensor Temperature OutputTerminal Temperature OutputRaw Value Output

0.1 °C / LSB0.1 °C / LSB2 µV / LSB

Conversion of Measurement Values to Temperature Values

Automatic in the module

Terminal Temperature Compensation Yes1)




NoNo






13.5.3 Scan Order

The analog input module AT664 scans the inputs with a constant cycle time.

13.5.4 Sensor Type Selection

Each module can be individually set to a certain sensor type. Automatic thermocouple calculation and raw value measurement can be combined without limitations.


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Other Modules

14. Other Modules


The group "Other Modules" includes combination modules, B&R 2003 expansions for the CP476 and motor modules.

14.2 Combination Modules

The combination module is a combination of digital input and output modules as well as analog input and output modules. The status of the digital inputs and outputs are indicated with status LEDs.

14.2.1 Overview

14.3 B&R 2003 Expansions for CP476

The CP476 now provides another expansion possibility on the far left of the system bus. Special expansion modules can be installed here.

14.3.1 Overview

14.4 Motor Modules

DC motors are controlled with these modules.

14.4.1 Overview

Module CM211 CM411

Digital Inputs


Nominal Input Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC

Digital Outputs

Number of Outputs 8 2

Switching Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC

Continuous Current Max. 0.5 A Max. 0.5 A

Analog Inputs


Input Signal ±10 V / 0 -20 mA ±10 V

Resolution 12 Bit 16 Bit

Analog Outputs


Output Signal ±10 V ±10 V

Resolution 12 Bit 16 Bit

Table 98: Combination module overview

Module Description

ME010 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot

ME020 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts

Table 99: CP476 expansion overview

Module Description

MM424 2003 motor module, four motor digital output levels, 24 VDC, 2 A at 50 °C, max. starting current 10 A (max. 50 ms), electronic over-current and over-temperature protection, status LEDs.

MM432 2003 motor bridge module, two motor (H) bridges, 10 - 30VDC @ 4A, peak current up to 8A (max. 2 s), integrated current closed loop controller, electronic overcurrent protection, 12 digital 24V inputs, can be optionally used for limit and position detection (counter functions, 20 kHz A/B/R evaluation), status LEDs.

Table 100: Motor module overview



14.5 CM211

14.5.1 Order Data



7CM211.7 2003 combination module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 4 ms, sink, 3 one-channel or 2 two-channel counters or 2 incremental encoders, 20 kHz, 8 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, short-circuit protection, 2 inputs, ± 10 V / 0-20 mA, 12 bit, 2 outputs, ± 10 V, 12 bit, Order TB718 terminal blocks separately!










Table 101: CM211 order data

Product ID CM211

General Information



Amount

CP430, EX270, EX470, EX770

CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774EX477, EX777

2

4

External Voltage Monitoring Yes (LED: OK), supply voltage >18 V

Electrical IsolationAnalog - PLCDigital - PLCDigital - Analog

NoNoNo


Analog Inputs

Input Type Asymmetric

Number of Inputs 2

Input Signal - Nominal ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA, can be set for each channel with switch

Maximum Continuous Overload (without damage)

±15 V / ±50 mA


Data Format Delivered to the Application Program 16 Bit 2s complement

Value RangeVoltage

+10V0 V-10 V

Current20 mA 0 mA

$7FFF$0000$8001

$7FFF$0000

Table 102: CM211 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


Measurement Range MonitoringOpen InputsRange Exceeded (neg.)

VoltageCurrent

Range Exceeded (pos.)General Error

$7FFF

$8001$0000$7FFF$8000

Conversion Method Successive approximation

Conversion Time <4 ms for both channels, the channels are converted cyclically

Input Impedance in Signal Range for Voltage Input

≥1 MΩ

Input Impedance in Signal Range for Current Input (load)

95 - 200 Ω

Input Filter Cut-off Frequency 500 Hz

Analog Outputs

Number of Outputs 2

Output Signal ±10 V

Load Max. ±10 mA


Data Format in Application Program 16 Bit 2s complement

Value Range+10 V0 V-10 V

$7FFF$0000$8001

Conversion Time <4 ms for both channels

Load Impedance ≥1 kΩ


Digital inputs

Number of Inputs 8

Type of Inputs 3 x event counters, 3 x period measurement, 3 x gate measurement, 2 x incremental encoder ABR (+24 V), 1 x comparator


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Wiring Sink

Switching ThresholdLOW RangeHIGH Range

<5 V>15 V

Delay 0 to 1with SW Filterwithout SW Filter

<4 ms (default)<0.01 ms

Delay 1 to 0with SW Filterwithout SW Filter

<4 ms (default)<0.01 ms

Status Display 8 Green LEDs

Incremental Encoder OperationSignal FormEvaluationInput FrequencyCount FrequencyCounter Size

Input 1Input 2Input 3Input 4

Input 5Input 6Input 7Input 8

Square wave pulse 4-fold, cyclic counter

20 kHz 80 kHz 32 Bit

Reference enable switch 1Channel A1Channel B1Channel R1

Channel A2Channel B2Channel R2

Reference enable switch 2

Product ID CM211

Table 102: CM211 technical data (cont.)



Event Counter OperationSignal FormEvaluationInput FrequencyCount FrequencyCounter SizeInput 2Input 3Input 5

Square wave pulse Each edge, cyclic counter

20 kHz 40 kHz 16 Bit

Counter 1Counter 2Counter 3

Period MeasurementSignal Form Square wave pulseEvaluationInput FrequencyInternal Counter FrequencyExternal Counter FrequencyCounter SizeInput 3Input 4Input 7Input 2Input 5

Square wave pulse Positive edge - Positive edge

20 kHz 16 MHz, 4 MHz, 1 MHz, 250 kHz

Max. 20 kHz16 Bit

Period channel 1Period channel 2Period channel 3

External counter frequency for channels 1 and 2External counter frequency for channel 3

Gate MeasurementSignal FormEvaluationInput FrequencyInternal Counter FrequencyExternal Counter FrequencyCounter SizeGate PauseInput 3Input 4Input 7Input 2Input 5

Square wave pulse Positive edge - Negative edge

10 kHz 16 MHz, 4 MHz, 1 MHz, 250 kHz

Max. 20 kHz16 Bit 50 µs

Gate channel 1Gate channel 2Gate channel 3

External counter frequency for channels 1 and 2External counter frequency for channel 3

ComparatorComparator OutputReaction TimeEvaluation

Incremental Encoder OperationEvent Counter Operation

Output 1<500 µs

Actual value comparison of the counter status of incremental encoder 1Comparison of the counter status of counter 2 (window comparator)

Electrical IsolationInput - Input No

Digital Outputs

Number and type of outputs 8 transistor outputs

Rated Current Max. 0.5 A

Total Output Current Max. 4 A

Rated Voltage 24 VDC

Switching Voltage Range 18 - 30 VDC

Leakage Current (0 signal) 12 µA

Wiring Source




Delay 0 to 1 <1.5 ms

Delay 1 to 0 <1.5 ms

Status Display 8 orange LEDs

Electrical IsolationOutput - Output No



Product ID CM211



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


14.6 CM411

14.6.1 Order Data



7CM411.70-1 2003 combination module, 3 inputs, 24 VDC, 50 kHz, sink, one or two channel counter, incremental encoder, 2 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, comparator function, short circuit protection, 3 inputs, +/- 10 V, 16 bit, 3 outputs, +/- 10 V, 16 bit, Order terminal blocks separately!






Table 103: CM411 order data

Product ID CM411

General Information



Amount 1)

CP430, EX270


1

2

Voltage and Output Monitoring Yes (LED: OK)Supply voltage >18 V, outputs OK

Electrical IsolationAnalog - PLCDigital - PLCDigital - Analog

NoYesYes


Analog Inputs

Number of Inputs 3

Input Signal - Nominal ±10 V


Data Format Delivered to the Application Program 16 Bit 2s complement

Value Range+10 V-10 V

$7FFF$8001

Measurement Range MonitoringOpen InputsRange Exceeded (neg.)Range Exceeded (pos.)General Error

$7FFF$8001$7FFF$8000

Input Impedance in Signal Range ≥1 MΩ

Table 104: CM411 technical data



Analog Outputs

Number of Outputs 3


Load Max. ±10 mA



Short Circuit Current ±15 mA (individual sustained short-circuit protection)

Digital inputs

Number and Type of Inputs 3 counter inputs

Wiring Sink


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

Switching ThresholdLOW RangeHIGH Range

<5 V>15 V

Input Delay Max. 3 µs


Incremental Encoder OperationSignal FormEvaluationInput FrequencyCount FrequencyCounter SizeInput 1Input 2Input 3

Square wave pulse 4-fold, cyclic counter

50 kHz 200 kHz

32 Bit Channel AChannel B

Ref

Event Counter OperationSignal FormEvaluationInput FrequencyCount FrequencyCounter SizeInput 1Input 2

Square wave pulse Each edge, cyclic counter

50 kHz 100 kHz 2 x 16 Bit Counter 1Counter 2

ComparatorEvaluation

Comparator OutputReaction Time

Actual value comparison of the counter value during incremental encoder operation or of counter 2 during event counter operation (window comparator)

Output 1<100 µs

Electrical IsolationInput - Input No

Digital Outputs

Number and type of outputs 2 transistor outputs

Rated Current Max. 0.5 A

Total Output Current Max. 1 A



Wiring Source






Electrical IsolationOutput - Output No




Product ID CM411



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


14.7 ME010

14.7.1 Order Data



7ME010.9 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot

0MC111.9 PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB FlashPROM

0MC211.9 PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB SRAM


Product ID ME010

General Information


Module Type B&R 2003 Expansion for CP476

Slot Can be installed on the far left of the system bus next to the CP476

Power Consumption 0.35 W, without PCMCIA memory card

Peripherals

PCMCIA InterfaceStandardCard HeightCard TypeMemory Size

SRAMFlashPROM

1JEIDA V 4.0 or PCMCIA Standard Release 2.0

Max. 3 mmMemory cards

Max. 4 MByteMax. 4 MByte

Status Display 2 LEDs


Module Width 20 mm





The CP476 now provides another expansion possibility on the far left of the system bus. Special expansion modules can be installed here. One of these is the ME010.

The ME010 provides a PCMCIA slot for B&R memory cards. This expansion can be used to update the controller. Another possibility is using the PCMCIA cards as external recipe memory for these types of applications.

In principle, it is possible to use memory cards as "normal" memory areas, but we strongly advice against this because the PCMCIA cards are not mechanically fixed in place and therefore are not vibration resistant. Access of memory cards is also very slow.

Diagram 28: B&R SYSTEM 2003 with ME010 expansion module


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


14.8 ME020

14.8.1 Order Data

The following B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts can be operated with the ME020 module:



7ME020.9 2003 expansion for the CP476, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts



The IF671 interface module insert shown in the picture is not included in the delivery.


Model Number Short Description

3IF613.9 Three RS232 interfaces

3IF621.9 One RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface

3IF622.9 One RS232 interface and two RS485/RS422 interfaces

3IF661.9 One RS485 interface (PROFIBUS-DP Slave)

3IF671.9 One RS232 interface, one RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface

3IF672.9 One RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces

3IF681.95 One RS232 interface and one ETHERNET interface with 10 BASE2 connection (CHEAPERNET BNC socket)

3IF681.96 One RS232 interface and one ETHERNET interface with 10 BASE-T connection (Twisted Pair / RJ45 socket)

Table 108: Overview of B&R SYSTEMS 2005 interface module inserts

Product ID ME020

General Information


Module Type B&R 2003 Expansion for CP476

Slot Can be installed on the far left of the system bus next to the CP476

Power Consumption 0.7 W, without PCMCIA memory card and without interface module insert

Peripherals


SRAMFlashPROM


Max. 3 mmMemory cards


Status Display 2 LEDs

Insert Slots 1 (for interface module inserts)


Module Width 37 mm





The CP476 now provides another expansion possibility on the far left of the system bus. Special expansion modules can be installed here. One of these is the ME020.

The ME020 provides a PCMCIA slot for B&R memory cards. This expansion can be used to update the controller. Another possibility is using the PCMCIA cards as external recipe memory for these types of applications.

In principle, it is possible to use memory cards as "normal" memory areas, but we strongly advice against this because the PCMCIA cards are not mechanically fixed in place and therefore are not vibration resistant. Access of memory cards is also very slow.

Additionally, the ME020 provides a slot for B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts.

Diagram 29: B&R SYSTEM 2003 with ME020 expansion module


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


14.9 MM424

14.9.1 Order Data



7MM424.70-1 2003 motor module, four motor digital output levels, 24 VDC, 2 A at 50 °C, max. starting current 10 A (max. 50 ms), electronic over-current and over-temperature protection, status LEDs, Order TB710 terminal block separately!






Table 110: MM424 order data

Product ID MM424

General Information



Amount

CP430, EX270


4

8

Status Display LEDs

Power ConsumptionInternal24 VDC Supply

0.5 W6.1 W

Environmental Temperature during Operation 0 -50 °C


Number of Motor Bridges 4

Type 4 push-pull outputs

Electrical IsolationBridge - PLCBridge - Bridge

YesNo

Diagnosis StatusVoltage Monitoring Motor supply voltage >18 V


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Max. 2 AMax. 8 A

To increase the output current, bridges can be switched in parallel.

Peak Current 5 A @ ≤200 ms

Starting Current 10 A @ ≤50 ms

Table 111: MM424 technical data




The motor module MM424 is used for digital control of up to four DC motors with a nominal voltage of 24 VDC at a nominal current of max. 2 A. Unlike the motor bridge module MM432, the motor module MM424 can only digitally switch the 24 VDC supply voltage to the respective motor. The following possibilities are available for the motor:

• Switch through 24 VDC: Motor is running

• Change polarity of plus and minus: Motor changes direction

• Plus and minus open: Motor freewheeling or spinout

• Plus and minus connected: Motor brakes itself

To increase the nominal current, outputs can be switched in parallel.

The module is controlled digitally, comparable with a DM435.

14.9.4 Area of Use

The motor module is mainly used for motor-drive combinations with or without a slip friction clutch. Any 24 VDC motor can be used if the specified currents are met.

The module does not have a brake resistance integrated, so generator operation of a motor can cause the supply voltage to increase excessively. Therefore this type of operation must be prevented mechanically.

The module is optimally suited as a very compact alternative to four reversing motor starter combinations in this performance range, especially for decentralized operation.

Switching On after Overload Cutoff Automatic within seconds (depends on the module temperature)

Protection Thermal cutoffOvercurrent cutoff






Product ID MM424



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


14.10 MM432

14.10.1 Order Data



7MM432.70-1 2003 motor bridge module, two motor (H) bridges, 10 - 30 VDC @ 4A, peak current up to 8A (max. 2 s), integrated current closed loop controller, electronic overcurrent protection, 12 digital 24 V inputs, can be optionally used for limit and position detection (counter functions, 20 kHz A/B/R evaluation), status LEDs,Order terminal blocks separately!










Table 112: MM432 order data

Product ID MM432

General Information



Amount

EX270 1

CP430, EX470, EX770 2

CP470, CP770, CP474, CP476, CP774 4

EX477, EX777

Status Display LEDs

Power Consumption 2.5 W

Environmental Temperature during Operation 0 to 55 °C

Standard Inputs

Amount 6

Wiring Sink

Nominal Voltage 24 VDC

Max. Input Voltage 30 VDC

Switching ThresholdLow RangeSwitching RangeHigh Range

<5 V5 - 15 V>15 V

Input Impedance Approx. 5 kΩ

Input Current Approx. 5 mA @ 24 VDC


Isolation No electrical isolation

Product ID MM432

ABR Inputs

Amount 6

Wiring Sink

Nominal Voltage 24 VDC

Max. Input Voltage 30 VDC





The motor bridge module MM432 is used to control two DC motors with a nominal voltage of 10 - 24 VDC at a nominal current up to 4 A. The module is also equipped with two ABR channels as well as six normal digital inputs for creating positioning tasks which are not too complex.

Each motor is controlled with a full-bridge (H-bridge). Therefore the motors can be moved in both directions. Each bridge branch has its own supply voltage. The advantage of this is that two different motors with different voltages can be used. Each channel has current measurement, supply voltage measurement, and short circuit recognition to ground and to the positive supply voltage. Motor control takes place using a 16 kHz PWM signal and is therefore mostly noise-free.

A local processor provides the required intelligence and is used for communication with the higher level CPU. It handles the preparation of the ABR inputs and normal digital input, the control of both motors (each with a PWM signal) and the analog measurements.

Switching ThresholdLow RangeSwitching RangeHigh Range

<5 V5 - 15 V>15 V

Input Impedance Approx. 5 kW

Input Current Approx. 5 mA @ 24 VDC

Max. Input Frequency 20 kHz

Input Delay Max. 6.5 µs

Operating Modes Control inputs, incremental (4-fold evaluation)

Isolation No electrical isolation

Motor Bridge - Power Section

Amount 2

Supply Voltage 10 - 30 VDC

Max. Overvoltage 35 VDC

Nominal Current 4 A

Max. Current (electr. limited) 8 A (max. 2 s)

PWM Frequency 16 kHz

Protection Ext. fuse 6.3 A (slow blow) required, short circuit protection to ground and positive voltage for each channel

Short Circuit Recognition <2.5 ms

Max. Short Circuit Current to Positive Voltage (lower bridge branch to positive voltage)

25 A ±25%

Max. Short Circuit Current to Ground(upper bridge branch to ground)

50 A

Max. Short Circuit Current between Motor Lines 25 A ±25%

Motor Bridge - Current Measurement

Amount 2

Measurement Range -0.1 to +8 A

Precision 50 mA



Product ID MM432

Table 113: MM432 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Communication Modules

15. Communication Modules

15.1 Overview

Module Description

IF311 2003 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, screw-in module

IF321 2003 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, screw-in module

IF361 2003 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, screw-in module

IF371 2003 interface module, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, screw-in module

Table 114: Communication module overview



15.2 IF311

15.2.1 Order Data



Interface module

7IF311.7 2003 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, screw-in module

Accessories


Table 115: IF311 order data

Product ID IF311

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


Slot CP interface or Power Panel interface, slots 1, 2 and 3

Power Consumption Max. 0.5 WMax. 1.6 W with P120 / P121 1)

1) Integrated power supply on pin 4 of the RS232 interface for simple PANELWARE™ controllers, e.g. P120.


Interface Type RS232

Electrical IsolationInterface - PLC No

Design 9 pin D-type plug

Handshake Lines RTS, CTS

Baudrate Max. 115.2 kBaud 2)


Distance 15 m at 19200 Baud

Network Capable No

Data FormatsData BitsParityStop Bits

5 to 8yes / no / even / odd

1 / 2



Table 116: IF311 technical data


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


15.3 IF321

15.3.1 Order Data



Interface module

7IF321.7 2003 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, screw-in module

Accessories


0AC916.9 Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks,remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC



Product ID IF321

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes





Interface Type RS485/RS422 1)


Electrical IsolationInterface - PLC Yes

Design 9 pin D-type socket

Handshake Lines ----

Baudrate Max. 115.2 kBaud 1)

Distance 1200 m (without repeater)

Network Capable Yes


7 / 8yes / no / even / odd

1 / 2






15.4 IF361

15.4.1 Order Data



Interface module

7IF361.70-1 2003 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, screw-in module

Accessories


0AC916.9 Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks,remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC



Product ID IF361

General Information







Controller ASIC SPC3

RAM 1.5 KByte

Transfer Protocol PROFIBUS-DP


Electrical Isolation Yes

Protective Circuit Yes

Maximum Distance 1,000 m

Maximum BaudrateBus Length < 100 mBus Length < 200 mBus Length < 400 mBus Length < 1,000 m

12 MBit/s 1.5 MBit/s 500 kBit/s

187.5 kBit/s

Network Capable Yes

Bus Termination Resistor External T-connector





Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


15.5 IF371

15.5.1 Order Data



Interface module

7IF371.70-1 2003 interface module, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, screw-in module

Accessories




Product ID IF371

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


Slot CP Interface, slots 1, 2 and 3



Interface Type CAN

Electrical Isolation Interface - PLC


Interface LEDs RXD and TXD


Maximum BaudrateBus Length 10 - 60 mBus Length 100 -200 mBus Length 800 -1,000 m

Max. 500 kBit/sMax. 250 kBit/sMax. 50 kBit/s

Network Capable Yes





B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Counter and Positioning Modules

16. Counter and Positioning Modules

16.1 Overview

Module Description

NC161 2003 encoder module, input frequency 100 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, screw-in module

Table 123: Counter and positioning module overview


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


16.2 NC161

16.2.1 Order Data



7NC161.7 2003 encoder module, input frequency 100 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, screw-in module


Table 124: NC161 order data

Product ID NC161

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



Power Consumption 0.3 W + Iencoder * 5.4 V

Encoder Input

General Information Connection using 15 pin D-type socket, incremental or SSI absolute encoder (both electrically isolated)

Incremental EncoderSignal FormEvaluationInput FrequencyCount FrequencyPhase Shift betweenChannel A and BCounter SizeInputsInput Level

Square wave pulse 4-fold

Max. 100 kHzMax. 400 kHz

90° ±15°

32 Bit A, A\, B, B\, R, R\

5 V (differential input)

SSI Absolute EncoderCodingWord SizeBaudrateData Input LevelClock Output LevelMax. Signal Delay Clock - Data

Gray, BinaryMax. 31 Bit100 kBaud

5 V (differential signal)5 V (differential signal)

≤2.5 µs

Additional Inputs +24 VDCReference Enable SwitchElectrical Isolation

Reference PulseElectrical Isolation

Connected using terminal blockYes

Connected using 15 pin D-type socket (pin 10 and 11)Yes

Encoder Supply

Output VoltageProtection

+5 VDC / max. 500 mA without external feedShort circuit and overload protection

Table 125: NC161 technical data




The NC161 is an encoder module with symmetrical incremental or absolute encoder evaluation.

A 5 V encoder supply is available directly on the module. The 24 V encoder supply voltage must be connected externally.

16.2.4 Operating Modes

The NC161 is used for single axis positioning with ramps in conjunction with the AO352 analog output module.


• Latches the counter value using the reference enable switch

• Enables use of a comparator output during incremental encoder operation.

External Supply VoltageProtection

+24 VDC /max. 300 mAShort circuit protection



Product ID NC161

Table 125: NC161 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Accessories

17. Accessories

17.1 Overview

17.2 AC010 / AC020

17.2.1 Order Data


If a module slot remains free, installing a bus cover on the first free slot is recommended. In this way, the last module can be protected from damage.

Model Number Description













Table 126: Accessory Overview




Table 127: AC010/AC020 order data



17.3 AC011

17.3.1 Order Data


The stress relief attachment is intended for used to wire the DO721 digital output module. It prevents the cabling placing too much stress on the 4 pin connectors.

The stress relief attachment is mounted underneath the DO721. To do this, a threaded strip is inserted in the module rack and the stress relief attachment is fastened with two screws. The mounting material is contained in the delivery of the stress relief attachment.

The wires running into the module are then secured to the stress relief attachment using cable ties. In this way, the connectors are freed from stress, and the integrity of the electrical wiring can be guaranteed.



Table 128: AC011 order data

Diagram 30: Mounting the stress relief attachment


Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


17.4 TB722

17.4.1 Order Data



The terminal block TB722 is used to supply the digital inputs on the DM435 module. It is a 22 pin dual level terminal block with either screw clamps or cage clamps. The contacts on the front are connected together and the ones on the back are also connected together which creates a positive potential and a ground rail.



TB722.9

TB722.91


Table 129: TB722 order data

Product ID TB722

Number of Pins 22

Type of Terminal Implemented as screw or cage clamps

Distance between Contacts 5.08 mm

Nominal Voltage 250 V

Current Load 1)

1) Take the respective limit data for the I/O modules into consideration!

Max. 12 A / contact

Wire Cross Section 0.14 mm² (AWG26) - 2.5 mm² (AWG12)

Cable Type Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!)

DimensionsHeightWidthDepth

TB722.933 mm76 mm52 mm

TB722.9133 mm76 mm33 mm

Table 130: TB722 technical data



17.5 TB733

17.5.1 Order Data



The terminal block TB733 is used as an additional jumper terminal if the digital mixed module DM435 is operated using a 3-line connection. The TB733 is a 33 pin 3-level terminal block with either screw clamps or cage clamps. All terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected.



TB733.9

TB733.91



Product ID TB733

Number of Pins 33All 11 terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected

Type of Terminal Implemented as screw or cage clamps



Current Load 1)


Max. 10 A / contact

Fuse External fuse is required




TB733.948 mm76 mm52 mm

TB733.9148 mm76 mm44 mm



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003


17.6 TB736

17.6.1 Order Data



The terminal block TB736 is used to supply the digital inputs on the DM465 module. The TB736 consists of two 18 pin pin-connectors and corresponding socket connectors as screw or cage clamp terminal blocks with ejection levers. All terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected.



TB736.9

TB736.91



Product ID TB736


Design Two 18 pin pin-connectors with corresponding contact socket as screw or cage clamp with ejection lever



Current Load 1)


Max. 12 A / contact




TB736.933 mm76 mm32 mm

TB736.9133 mm76 mm32 mm




17.7 TB754

17.7.1 Order Data



The terminal block is used as an additional jumper terminal and is specially designed for 3-line connections, e.g. for the DM465 (3-line sensors). The TB754 consists of three18 pin pin-connectors and corresponding socket connectors as screw or cage clamp terminal blocks with ejection levers. All connections in a terminal row are electrically connected.



TB754.9

TB754.91



Product ID TB754


Design Three 18 pin pin-connectors with corresponding contact socket as screw or cage clamp with ejection lever



Current Load 1)


Max. 12 A / contact





50 mm76 mm32 mm



Cha

pter

2B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

003

B&R SYSTEM 2003 • Manuals

17.8 TB772

17.8.1 Order Data



The terminal block TB772 is used as an additional jumper terminal if the digital mixed module DM465 is operated using a 3-line connection. The TB772 consists of two 36 pin pin-connectors and corresponding socket connectors as cage clamp terminal blocks with ejection levers. All terminals in a terminal row are electrically connected.

18. Manuals

18.1 Overview




Product ID TB772


Design Two 36 pin pin-connectors and corresponding contact sockets as cage clamp terminal blocks with ejection levers



Current Load 1)


Max. 5 A / contact


Wire Cross Section 0.5 mm² - 1 mm²



48 mm76 mm34 mm



MASYS22003-0 B&R 2003 User’s Manual, German

MASYS22003-E B&R 2003 User’s Manual, English

Table 139: Manual overview




Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



1. Module Overview

The "Power" column contains a power value provided by the module or required by the module. In this way, a power balance can be calculated quickly and easily for a certain hardware configuration.

The power supplied by the PS modules is shown with a "+" sign. The power required by a module is shown with a "-" sign.

Add the positive and negative power values to calculate the power balance. The sum is not allowed to be less than zero.


Product ID Description Backplane Power Model No. Page

--- 2005 positioning accessories, cable for operating system download directly from the PC to the NC154

0G2001.00-090 257



AC240 Battery module for two 9 V block cells, separate slot 0AC240.9 256

AI350 8 voltage inputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit Main and Expansion

-5 W 3AI350.6 209

AI375 8 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, resolution 12 bit Main and Expansion

-5 W 3AI375.6 209

AI775 8 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit Main and Expansion

-5 W 3AI775.6 209

AM050 4 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 4 voltage outputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit

Main and Expansion

-6.5 W 3AM050.6 213

AM051 4 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 4 current outputs 0 - 20 mA,resolution 12 bit

Main and Expansion

-6.5 W 3AM051.6 215

AM055 5 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 3 voltage outputs ±10 V, 1 potentiometer voltage +10 V, resolution 12 bit

Main and Expansion

-7 W 3AM055.6 217

AM374 4 input 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, 4 outputs ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA, signal switched in groups of 2

Main and Expansion

-6.5 W 3AM374.6 219

AO350 8 voltage outputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit Main and Expansion

-5 W 3AO350.6 211

AO775 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 11 bit Main and Expansion

-5.5 W 3AO775.6 211

AT350 4 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) Main and Expansion

-4 W 3AT350.6 222


-4 W 3AT450.6 222

AT660 8 inputs for FeCuNi sensors with type L + J, NiCrNi sensors with type K, raw value measurement

Main and Expansion

-6 W 3AT660.6 224

BM150 Dummy module Main and Expansion

3BM150.9 258

BP150 Backplane with 15 slots 3BP150.4 160

BP150 Backplane with 15 slots, backup battery 3BP150.41 160







CP260 CPU with 2 insert slots, PCMCIA memory card Main -8.4 W 3CP260.60-1 175

Table 1: B&R SYSTEM 2005 sorted alphabetically according to product ID



DI450 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 4 counter inputs, gate/period measurement Main and Expansion

-2 W 3DI450.60-9 189

DI475 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay Main and Expansion

-1.5 W 3DI475.6 191


-1.5 W 3DI476.6 191

DI477 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection: D-type connector

Main and Expansion

-1.5 W 3DI477.6 193

DI486 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection: terminal block

Main and Expansion

-1.2 W 3DI486.6 194

DI695 16 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay Main and Expansion

-1.5 W 3DI695.6 195

DM455 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 µs, 8 transistor outputs, 0 - 50 VDC, 1 A Main and Expansion

-3.5 W 3DM455.60-2 185

DM476 16 dig. inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC, 1 ms, 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.4 A, connection: D-type connector

Main and Expansion

-2.5 W 3DM476.6 206

DO479 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A Main and Expansion

-1 W 3DO479.6 197

DO480 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A Main and Expansion

-2.5 W 3DO480.6 197

DO650 16 relay outputs, 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A Main and Expansion

-4 W 3DO650.6 199

DO690 8 triac outputs, 120 VAC, 1 A Main and Expansion

-1.5 W 3DO690.6 201


-3 W 3DO750.6 199


-4 W 3DO760.6 203

EX150 Remote I/O Master Main -5.5 W 3EX150.60-1 169

EX250 Remote I/O Slave, power supply insert -1.6 W 3EX250.60-1 171

EX350 I/O Master Controller, power supply insert -1.5 W 3EX350.6 173

IF050 Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1x RS232/TTY Main -7 W 3IF050.6 227

IF060 Interface module with insert slot for interface module inserts Main -1 W 3IF060.6 229

IF260 CPU or programmable interface module processor, 850 KByte SRAM, 1,5 MByte FlashPROM, 1 insert slot

Main -3.5 W 3IF260.60-1 177

IF613 Interface module for insert slot, 3 x RS232 -1.2 W 3IF613.9 230

IF621 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN -1.5 W 3IF621.9 231

IF622 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x RS485/RS422 -1.25 W 3IF622.9 233

IF661 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485 (PROFIBUS-DP slave)

-2 W 3IF661.9 235

IF671 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN

-2 W 3IF671.9 236

IF672 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x CAN -1.8 W 3IF672.9 238

IF681.95 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET (10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket)

-2.4 W 3IF681.95 240

IF681.96 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET (10BASE-T: twisted pair RJ45 socket)

-1.65 W 3IF681.96 242

IP161 Programmable I/O Processor, 850 KByte SRAM, 1,5 MByte FlashPROM, 1 x RS232, 1 x CAN, max. 12 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2,5 µs switching delay, max. 12 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog inputs, ±10 V, 14 bit, 6 analog outputs, ±10 V, 12 Bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block

Main -14.5 W 1)

-3.5 f. Pot.3IP161.60-1 179

NC150 Counter module, 2 32 bit counters, 100 kHz, 2 voltage outputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit

Main and Expansion

-5 W 3NC150.6 246

NC154 Positioning module, 3 axes, each axis has the following data: input for incremental encoder 5 V, input frequency 150 kHz, input for SSI absolute encoder, analog output ±10 V, 12 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 4 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, trigger input 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC/24 VDC, 1 A

Main -6 W 3NC154.60-2 248

NC157 Positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs 24 VDC, sink

-6 W 3NC157.60-1 252

NW150 PROFIBUS network module Main -7 W 3NW150.60-1 244


Table 1: B&R SYSTEM 2005 sorted alphabetically according to product ID (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



PS465 Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slot Main and Expansion

+50 W 3PS465.9 163

PS477 Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slave Main and Expansion

+50 W 3PS477.9 163

PS692 Power supply 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave Main and Expansion

+45 W 3PS692.9 165

PS694 Power supply 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot Main and Expansion

+45 W 3PS694.9 165


+45 W 3PS792.9 167


+45 W 3PS794.9 167

TB162 Single row terminal block, 12 pin, screw clamps 3TB162.9 259


TB170 Single row terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 3TB170.91 260

TB170 20 single row terminal blocks, 20 pin, screw clamps 3TB170:90-02 260

TB170 20 single row terminal blocks, 20 pin, cage clamps 3TB170:91-02 260

XP152 CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM -4 W 3XP152.60-2 182

1) 3.5 W is required for potentiometer voltage (if used externally).


Module Rack









Power Supply Modules

PS465 Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slot Main and Expansion

+50 W 3PS465.9 163

PS477 Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slave Main and Expansion

+50 W 3PS477.9 163


+45 W 3PS692.9 165


+45 W 3PS694.9 165


+45 W 3PS792.9 167


+45 W 3PS794.9 167


EX150 Remote I/O Master Main -5.5 W 3EX150.60-1 169

EX250 Remote I/O Slave, power supply insert -1.6 W 3EX250.60-1 171

EX350 I/O Master Controller, power supply insert -1.5 W 3EX350.6 173

CPUs

CP260 CPU with 2 insert slots, PCMCIA memory card Main -8.4 W 3CP260.60-1 175

IF260 CPU or programmable interface module processor, 850 KByte SRAM, 1,5 MByte FlashPROM, 1 insert slot

Main -3.5 W 3IF260.60-1 177






IP161 Programmable I/O Processor, 850 KByte SRAM, 1,5 MByte FlashPROM, 1 x RS232, 1 x CAN, max. 12 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2,5 µs switching delay, max. 12 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog inputs, ±10 V, 14 bit, 6 analog outputs, ±10 V, 12 Bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block

Main -14.5 W 1)

-3.5 f. Pot.3IP161.60-1 179

XP152 CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM -4 W 3XP152.60-2 182

Programmable Modules

DM455 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 µs, 8 transistor outputs, 0 - 50 VDC, 1 A Main and Expansion

-3.5 W 3DM455.60-2 185


DI450 16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 4 counter inputs, gate/period measurement Main and Expansion

-2 W 3DI450.60-9 189


-1.5 W 3DI475.6 191


-1.5 W 3DI476.6 191

DI477 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection: D-type connector

Main and Expansion

-1.5 W 3DI477.6 193

DI486 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection: terminal block

Main and Expansion

-1.2 W 3DI486.6 194

DI695 16 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay Main and Expansion

-1.5 W 3DI695.6 195


DO479 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A Main and Expansion

-1 W 3DO479.6 197

DO480 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A Main and Expansion

-2.5 W 3DO480.6 197


-4 W 3DO650.6 199

DO690 8 triac outputs, 120 VAC, 1 A Main and Expansion

-1.5 W 3DO690.6 201


-3 W 3DO750.6 199


-4 W 3DO760.6 203

Digital Mixed Modules

DM476 16 dig. inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC, 1 ms, 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.4 A, connection: D-type connector

Main and Expansion

-2.5 W 3DM476.6 206


AI350 8 voltage inputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit Main and Expansion

-5 W 3AI350.6 209

AI375 8 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, resolution 12 bit Main and Expansion

-5 W 3AI375.6 209

AI775 8 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit Main and Expansion

-5 W 3AI775.6 209


AO350 8 voltage outputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit Main and Expansion

-5 W 3AO350.6 211

AO775 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 11 bit Main and Expansion

-5.5 W 3AO775.6 211

Analog Mixed Modules

AM050 4 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 4 voltage outputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit

Main and Expansion

-6.5 W 3AM050.6 213

AM051 4 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 4 current outputs 0 - 20 mA,resolution 12 bit

Main and Expansion

-6.5 W 3AM051.6 215

AM055 5 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 3 voltage outputs ±10 V, 1 potentiometer voltage +10 V, resolution 12 bit

Main and Expansion

-7 W 3AM055.6 217

AM374 4 input 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, 4 outputs ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA, signal switched in groups of 2

Main and Expansion

-6.5 W 3AM374.6 219

Temperature Modules


-4 W 3AT350.6 222




Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



-4 W 3AT450.6 222


Main and Expansion

-6 W 3AT660.6 224


IF050 Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1x RS232/TTY Main -7 W 3IF050.6 227

IF060 Interface module with insert slot for interface module inserts Main -1 W 3IF060.6 229

IF613 Interface module for insert slot, 3 x RS232 -1.2 W 3IF613.9 230

IF621 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN -1.5 W 3IF621.9 231

IF622 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x RS485/RS422 -1.25 W 3IF622.9 233

IF661 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485 (PROFIBUS-DP slave)

-2 W 3IF661.9 235

IF671 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN

-2 W 3IF671.9 236

IF672 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x CAN -1.8 W 3IF672.9 238

IF681.95 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET (10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket)

-2.4 W 3IF681.95 240

IF681.96 Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET (10BASE-T: twisted pair RJ45 socket)

-1.65 W 3IF681.96 242

NW150 PROFIBUS network module Main -7 W 3NW150.60-1 244


NC150 Counter module, 2 32 bit counters, 100 kHz, 2 voltage outputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit

Main and Expansion

-5 W 3NC150.6 246

NC154 Positioning module, 3 axes, each axis has the following data: input for incremental encoder 5 V, input frequency 150 kHz, input for SSI absolute encoder, analog output ±10 V, 12 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 4 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, trigger input 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC/24 VDC, 1 A

Main -6 W 3NC154.60-2 248

NC157 Positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs 24 VDC, sink

-6 W 3NC157.60-1 252

Accessories

AC240 Battery module for two 9 V block cells, separate slot 0AC240.9 256

--- 2005 positioning accessories, cable for operating system download directly from the PC to the NC154

0G2001.00-090 257

BM150 Dummy module Main and Expansion

3BM150.9 258



TB170 Single row terminal block, 20 pin, cage clamps 3TB170.91 260

TB170 20 single row terminal blocks, 20 pin, screw clamps 3TB170:90-02 260

TB170 20 single row terminal blocks, 20 pin, cage clamps 3TB170:91-02 260

Manuals



1) 3.5 W is required for potentiometer voltage (if used externally).






2.1 Dimensions

The B&R 2005 system has both single and double width modules, depending on to the slots needed.

The measurements given are installation measurements. The depth of the backplane must be added to the total depth of PLC.

2.2 Basic Module Construction

The following elements can be found behind the module door:

• Status LEDs

• Node Number Switch

• Reset Button

• Connection Plug

Openings are provided in the module door so that the LEDs can be read without the door being open.

A label strip can be inserted on the inside of the module door which can be seen from the outside.

Width Slots

Single width 1

Double width 2

Table 3: B&R SYSTEM 2005 Dimensions

Diagram 1: B&R SYSTEM 2005 module dimensions

Diagram 2: B&R SYSTEM2005 module construction


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


2.3 Module Rack

All System 2005 backplanes have the same construction. The only difference is the number of slots available:

When installing backplanes, make sure to leave a min. of 20 mm on the left and right for the fastening levers.

2.4 Mounting Rail

A mounting rail which conforms to the standard DIN EN 50022 is required to mount the PLC. The mounting rail is electrically connected to the back wall of the cabinet.


Slots Module Rack Length x

6 BP155 240 mm

9 BP152 360 mm

12 BP151 480 mm

15 BP150 600 mm

Table 4: B&R SYSTEM 2005 module slots

Diagram 3: B&R SYSTEM 2005 installation dimensions

Diagram 4: Mounting Rail



2.5 Installation


The installation of the PLC takes place in the following order:

• Install mounting rail

• Install the backplane

• Install the PLC modules

2.5.1 Installing the Backplane

The following steps are to be taken in order to secure the backplane on the mounting rail:

• Set all fastening levers to the "OPEN" position

• Hang the backplane on the desired position on the mounting rail

• Set all fastening levers to the "CLOSE" position

Removing backplane modules is done in the reverse order!


Diagram 6: Installing the backplane on the mounting rail


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


2.5.2 Install the PLC modules

After the backplane is secured to the mounting rail, the PLC modules can be inserted into the corresponding slots on the backplane. A module is to be installed in the following order:

(1) Hang the module in the corresponding module slot using the module support hook.

(2) Tip the module back until the upper fastening clip clicks onto the PLC module.

The PLC modules are removed in the opposite order.

Pressing the release lever (1) unclips the lock pin. The module can then be tipped forwards (2) and removed from the backplane (3).

Diagram 7: Install module

Diagram 8: Tip the module back

Diagram 9: Removing a module



2.6 Terminal Block TB170

Single row terminal blocks, which can be removed with two ejection levers, are used to wire most modules. They are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps.


All cables (cable bundles) are to be run down from the terminal blocks.

A cable tie is used to relieve strain on the terminal block and is to be attached to the slots provided on the module housing.

Diagram 10: Screw clamps

Diagram 11: Cage clamps


Diagram 13: Stress relief using cable ties


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The following values are valid for all B&R SYSTEM 2005 modules if no other values are listed in the "Technical Data" section.

3. Module Rack


Backplane modules are installed on a standard mounting rail. They are used for installing controller components (CPU, I/O modules, power supply modules, system modules, etc.). The I/O bus, system bus and the supply lines are provided on the backplanes. Backplanes are available with 6, 9, 12 or 15 slots for the B&R SYSTEM 2005.

You are recommended to use the smallest backplane so that as few slots as possible remain free! Dummy module must be installed in all free slots.

The backplane modules 3BP15x.41 are equipped with a backup battery. This lithium battery is used to buffer data centrally on the 2005 PLC (e.g. XP152 data and real time clock).

The module address is determined by the slot (slot coding). Module addressing begins with slot 3, which has address 1. For PLC systems with an operating system older than version 1.10, module addressing for system modules begins with address 0 (numbering is different for system and I/O modules).

The following modules can be used depending on whether the backplane is used as a main backplane or an expansion backplane:



Table 5: Environmental Temperature and Relative Humidity

Diagram 14: Module rack general information

Slot Main Backplane Expansion Backplane

1

2

Power supply with expansion slot

or any other power supply

Power Supply: with expansion slot or

with expansion slave

3

4

System or I/O module I/O module

I/O module

5 System or I/O module I/O module


: : :

: : :


Table 6: Module overview for main and expansion backplanes



3.2 BP150 / BP151 / BP152 / BP155

3.2.1 Order Data



Module Rack

3BP150.4 2005 backplane, 15 slots




3BP150.41 2005 backplane, 15 slots, with backup battery




Accessories



Table 7: BP150 / BP151 / BP152 / BP155 order data

Product ID BP150 BP151 BP152 BP155

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Number of Slots 15 12 9 6

Dimensions 1)HeightWidthDepth

165 mm600 mm23 mm

165 mm480 mm23 mm

165 mm360 mm23 mm

165 mm240 mm23 mm

Number of Modules that can be Inserted

On the Main Backplane1 Power Supply + ...

On Expansion Backplane1 Power Supply + ...

13 system orI/O modules

13 I/O modules


10 I/O modules


7 I/O modules


4 I/O modules

Backup Battery

Type

Storage Time (not installed)

Only backplanes with model no. 3BP15x.41

Lithium battery - 3 V / 950 mAh

Max. 3 years at 30 °C

Storage Temperature

BackplaneWithout Lithium Batt.

BackplaneWith Lithium Batt.

Lithium Batt. (not installed)

-20 to +70 °C

-20 to +60 °C

-20 to +60 °C

Table 8: BP150 / BP151 / BP152 / BP 155 technical data


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005

B&R SYSTEM 2005 • Power Supply Modules

4. Power Supply Modules


Power supply modules create the voltages required internally by the PLC from the input voltage (24 VDC, 120 VAC or 230 VAC). Each main and expansion unit requires its own power supply module. The power supply module always has to be operated in the far left slot of the backplane. All power supply modules require two slots.

When configuring a system, make sure that the power consumption of all modules installed is not larger than the output power of the power supply module. If a power supply cannot provide the power required by the modules, install the I/O modules on an expansion backplane.

4.2 Safety Features

Power supply modules are equipped with an internal current limit (short circuit protection) and have connections for an external buffer voltage (AC240 battery module). The current limit also becomes active if the modules installed require more power than the power supply can deliver; in this case, the CPU is reset without a power failure having occurred.

A fuse protects the module against overloads and reverse polarity. The fuse is behind the module door.

The function of the PLC can be monitored with a ready relay. The ready relay is set in normal operation and opens if an error which causes the PLC to fail occurs. The ready relay is normally connected to the E-STOP circuit.

4.3 Special Functions

Some power supply modules also have special functions, e.g. a remote I/O slave, an expansion slave or an expansion slot.

4.4 Expansion Slot

Power supply modules PS465, PS694 and PS794 have an expansion slot. For example, the XP152 CPU can be placed in this expansion slot.

4.5 Expansion Slave (local expansion)

An expansion slave is built into power supply modules PS477, PS692 and PS792 which allows another I/O bus segment to be started. With local expansion, the expansion unit (expansion slave) is installed near the main unit (expansion master), usually in the same switching cabinet. Up to four expansion slaves can be operated on an expansion master.

4.6 Remote Slave (remote expansion)

The remote slave EX250 can be inserted in the expansion slot on power supply modules PS465, PS694 and PS794. The remote slave can be connected to the remote master bus cable on 2005 or 2010 systems. With remote expansion (remote I/O), the expansion unit (remote slave) can be up to 1200 m from the main unit (remote master). With a repeater, the network can be extended even further. Without a repeater, a maximum of 31 remote slaves can be connected to a remote master.



4.7 Overview

The distinguishing features relevant for power supply modules are input voltage, output power and special functions.

Power Supply Module PS465 PS477

Input Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC

Output Power 50 W 50 W

Special FunctionExpansion SlaveExpansion Slot

NoYes

YesNo

Fuse (slow-blow) 5 A / 250 V 5 A / 250 V

Table 9: PS465 / PS477 overview


Input Voltage 120 VAC 120 VAC



YesNo

NoYes

Fuse (slow-blow) 1.6 A / 250 V 1.6 A / 250 V



Input Voltage 230 VAC 230 VAC



YesNo

NoYes

Fuse (slow-blow) 1.6 A / 250 V 1.6 A / 250 V



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


4.8 PS465 / PS477

4.8.1 Order Data

The following modules can be operated in an expansion slot:

The EX150 module is used as a remote I/O master:




3PS465.9 2005 power supply module, 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slot

3PS477.9 2005 power supply module, 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slave

Accessories

0G0010.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010


Table 12: PS465 / PS477 order data

Model Number Short Description See Section

3EX250.60-1 Remote I/O slave, power supply insert Bus Controller Modules

3EX350.6 I/O master controller, power supply insert Bus Controller Modules

3XP152.60-2 CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM

CPUs

Table 13: Overview of the modules that can be operated in an expansion slot


3EX150.60-1 Remote I/O master Bus Controller Modules

Table 14: Remote I/O Master EX150

Product ID PS465 PS477

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2005 power supply module, double width

SlotMain RackExpansion Rack

1 + 21 + 2

Power Supply


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

Table 15: PS465 / PS477 technical data



External Back-up Capacitorfor Single Phase Bridgefor Three Phase Bridge

10,000 µF6,000 µF

Output Power Max. 50 W

Current Requirements Max. 3.5 A

Input Capacitance 500 µF

Fuse 6.3 A (slow-blow) / 250 V

Peripherals

Expansion Slave No Yes

Expansion Slot Yes No

External RAM Buffering by Supplying 12 V (min. 8 V / max. 30 V)

Status Display LEDs

READY RelayDesignSwitching VoltageSwitching CurrentProtection

Normally openMax. 30 VDC

Max. 3 A370 V transient voltage protection diode to ground


Table 15: PS465 / PS477 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


4.9 PS692 / PS694

4.9.1 Order Data






3PS692.9 2005 power supply module, 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave

3PS694.9 2005 power supply module, 120 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot

Accessories





3EX250.60-1 Remote I/O Slave, power supply insert Bus Controller Modules

3EX350.6 I/O Master Controller, power supply insert Bus Controller Modules

3XP152.60-2 CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM

CPUs



3EX150.60-1 Remote I/O Master Bus Controller Modules



General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



1 + 21 + 2

Power Supply


92 VAC120 VAC133 VAC

Input Voltage Frequency 47 to 63 Hz




OvervoltagePeak ValueHalf-peak Duration

<500 V<10 ms (non-periodic)




Peripherals

Expansion Slave Yes No

Expansion Slot No Yes


Status Display LEDs


Normally openMax. 270 VAC / 30 VDC

Max. 3 A780 V VDR internal




Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


4.10 PS792 / PS794

4.10.1 Order Data


The EX150 module is use as a remote I/O master:




3PS792.9 2005 power supply module, 230 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slave

3PS794.9 2005 power supply module, 230 VAC, 45 W, with expansion slot

Accessories





3EX250.60-1 Remote I/O slave, power supply insert Bus Controller Modules

3EX350.6 I/O master controller, power supply insert Bus Controller Modules

XP152.60-2 CPU, power supply insert, CAN interface, 512 KByte FlashPROM

CPUs






General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



1 + 21 + 2

Power Supply








<500 V<10 ms (non-periodic)




Peripherals

Expansion Slave Yes No

Expansion Slot No Yes


Status Display LEDs


Normally openMax. 270 VAC / 30 VDC

Max. 3 A780 V VDR internal


Table 23: PS792 / PS794 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



5.1 Overview

5.2 EX150

5.2.1 Order Data


Module Description

EX150 2005 remote I/O master, electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus

EX250 2005 remote I/O slave controller, electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus, power supply module insert

EX350 2005 local I/O master controller, controls I/O modules on up to four expansion backplanes, power supply module insert

Table 24: Bus Controller Module Overview


Remote I/O Master

3EX150.60-1 2005 remote I/O master, electrically isolated RS485 interface, to connect to a remote I/O bus

Accessories

0G1000.00-090 Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O

0AC916.9 Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O,standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC

Additional accessories see sections "Accessories" and "Manuals".


Product ID EX150

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2005 system module, single width

Can be Installed onMain RackExpansion Rack

YesNo


Peripherals

Diagnosis LEDs Yes

Number Switch Setting the slave address





Remote Master

The remote master is a system module that can be used to connect I/O modules to the CPU over long distances. The remote master and up to 31 remote slaves are connected with a bus cable.

Remote Slave

The EX250 bus controller is used as remote slave. The bus controller is a power supply insert.



100 kBit/s181 kBit/s500 kBit/s1000 kBit/s2000 kBit/s



Max. 1,200 mMax. 1,000 mMax. 400 mMax. 200 mMax. 100 m

Remote I/O BusAccess ProcedureNumber of Remote I/O MastersNumber of SlavesTopologyConnection to the BusTransfer MediaTermination Resistance

Master-slave principleMax. 8

Max. 31 (without repeater)Physical bus

DirectShielded, twisted pair

External

Product ID EX150



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


5.3 EX250

5.3.1 Order Data


Product IDEX250


Remote I/O Slave

3EX250.60-1 2005 remote I/O slave controller, electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus, power supply module insert

Accessories








General Information


Slot Insert for power supplies PS465, PS694 or PS794


Peripherals

Diagnosis LEDs Yes

Number Switch Setting the slave address





Baudrates100 kBit/s181 kBit/s500 kBit/s1000 kBit/s2000 kBit/s

Depends on the distanceMax. 1,200 mMax. 1,000 mMax. 400 mMax. 200 mMax. 100 m

Remote I/O Bus

Access Procedure Master-slave principle

Topology Physical bus

Connection to the Bus Direct





A B&R SYSTEM 2005 controller is integrated into a remote I/O bus as slave station using the EX250 bus controller. A bus cable is used to connect the remote master station and up to 31 remote slave stations. Each B&R SYSTEM 2005 slave begins a new I/O bus on which a maximum of 13 modules can be addressed.

The EX250 bus controller is operated in an expansion slot on power supply modules PS465, PS694 or PS794.

The module is equipped with status LEDs, two number switches for slave address settings and a connector for an RS485 interface.

Transfer Media Shielded, twisted pair

Termination Resistance External

Baudrate Automatic baudrate recognition

Diagram 15: EX250 bus controller

General Information

Table 29: EX250 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


5.4 EX350

5.4.1 Order Data



Using the EX350 I/O master controller allows up to four expansion backplanes (including all I/O modules) to be operated with the CPUs CP260, IF260 and IP161.

The I/O master controller is operated in the expansion slot of a PS465, PS694 or PS794 power supply module. The I/O modules on the main backplane are handled by the CPU. The EX350 module supports the CPU when processing I/O module data on the expansion backplane.


Local I/O Master Controller

3EX350.6 2005 local I/O master controller, controls I/O modules on up to four expansion backplanes, power supply module insert

Accessories




Product ID EX350

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



Processor Section

Data Buffering Battery buffered via B&R 2005 backplane

Number of Expansion Backplanes Max. 4

Number of I/O Data PointsDigitalAnalog

Refers to B&R 2005 main and expansion systems1024 inputs / 1024 outputs512 inputs / 512 outputs

Communication Interface

InterfaceElectrical IsolationAccess Procedure

Expansion MasterNo

B&R local I/O bus expansion (secure)




6. CPUs

6.1 Programming


6.2 Buffering

Buffering data and guaranteeing that the real-time clock operates during power failures is handled centrally by the backplane or the AC240 battery module.

6.3 Programming the FlashPROM

Programming and deleting the built-in FlashPROM memory takes place using the programming system.

6.4 Overview








Table 32: CPU programming

Module Description

CP260 2005 CPU, 4 MB DRAM, 850 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 2 insert slots, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 RS232 interface

IF260 2005 CPU or progr. interface processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts

IP161 2005 programmable I/O processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 12 dig. inputs 24 VDC, sink, max. 12 dig. outputs 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog inputs +/-10 V, 14 bit, 6 analog outputs +/-10 V, 12 bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block, Order terminal blocks separately!

XP152 2005 CPU, 118 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, power supply module insert



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


6.5 CP260

6.5.1 Order Data

The following interface module inserts can be used with the CP260:



CPU

3CP260.60-1 2005 CPU, 4 MB DRAM, 850 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 2 insert slots, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 RS232 interface

Memory Cards



Accessories



Table 34: CP260 order data










Table 35: B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts

Product ID CP260

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2005 CPU, double width


3 + 4----

Power Consumptionat 5 Vat 24 V (fan)

Max. 6.1 W without memory cards and without interface modulesMax. 2.3 W

Processor Section

Instruction Cycle Time 0.2 µsec

Data and Program Code Cache 2 x 256 Byte

Table 36: CP260 technical data




The CPU is inserted in the main rack directly next to the power supply module. It requires two slots. Only the status LEDs can be seen with the module door closed. Behind the module door, you will find the operational and display elements, the two insertion slots for interface modules, the PCMCIA interface and the RS232 interface.

Standard MemoryRAMSystem RAMUser RAMSystem PROMUser PROM

4 MByte DRAM174 KByte SRAM 850 KByte SRAM

512 KByte FlashPROM 512 KByte FlashPROM

Data BufferingBackup Battery in 2005 Backplanewith Battery Module AC240Buffering with NiMH Rechargeable BatteryBattery Monitoring

Min. 4 yearsMin. 2.5 yearsMin. 2 months

Yes

Peripherals


SRAMFlashPROM


Max. 3 mmMemory Cards



Nonvolatile1 s

Reset Button Yes

Status Display LEDs



Application Interface IF1Electrical IsolationDesignDistanceBaudrate

RS232No

9 pin D-type plugMax. 15 m / 19200 Baud

Max. 64 kBaud

Diagram 16: CP260 operational elements and display elements

Product ID CP260

Table 36: CP260 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


6.6 IF260

6.6.1 Order Data

The interface modules listed below can be used with the IF260 module. An interface module with an RS232 interface is required for a direct online connection.



CPU or Programmable Interface Processor

3IF260.60-1 2005 CPU or progr. interface processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts

Accessories













Table 38: B&R SYSTEM 2005 interface module inserts

Product ID IF260

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


Slot3≥4

CPU operationProgrammable interface processor operation


Processor Section

Instruction Cycle Time 0.4 µs





The IF260 module can be used either as CPU or as programmable interface processor. The module recognizes the correct operating mode from the slot used (slot 3 -> CPU module). The IF260 module is equipped with a CPU section and an insert slot for interface modules.

The operational elements, display elements and an insert slot for an interface module are behind the module door.

Standard MemorySystem RAMUser RAMSystem PROMUser PROM

174 KByte SRAM 850 KByte SRAM


Data Buffering Backup Batteryin 2005 Backplanewith Battery Module AC240with NiMH Rechargeable BatteryBattery Monitoring

Min. 4 yearsMin. 2.5 yearsMin. 2 months

Yes, when operated as main CPU

Peripherals


Nonvolatile1 s


Reset Button Yes

Status Display 5 Status LEDs

Diagram 17: IF260 operational elements and display elements

Product ID IF260

Table 39: IF260 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


6.7 IP161

6.7.1 Order Data



Programmable I/O Processor

3IP161.60-1 2005 programmable I/O processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, max. 12 dig. inputs 24 VDC, sink, max. 12 dig. outputs 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog inputs +/- 10 V, 14 bit, 6 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block, Order terminal blocks separately!



3TB170:90-02 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps

3TB170:91-02 2005 terminal block, 20 pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps

Accessories



0AC912.9 Bus Adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface

0AC913.92 Bus Adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable

0AC961.9 Accessories, Bus Adapter (CAN, RS232)


Table 40: IP161 order data

Product ID IP161

General Information


Module Type B&R 2005 system module, double width

Slot3≥4

CPU operation (slots 3+4 used)Programmable I/O processor operation

Power ConsumptionDigital SectionAnalog Section

Max. 6.5 WMax. 8 W + 3.5 W for potentiometer voltage (if used externally)

Processor Section


Standard MemorySystem RAMUser RAMSystem PROMUser PROM

174 KByte SRAM 850 KByte SRAM

512 KByte FlashPROM 1.5 MByte FlashPROM

Data BufferingBackup Battery in 2005 Backplanewith Battery Module AC240Battery Monitoring

Min. 4 yearsMin. 2 years

Yes, when operated as main CPU

Peripherals


Nonvolatile during CPU operation (buffered externally)1 s

Reset Button Yes

Status Display 4 Status LEDs, 4 Interface LEDs

Table 41: IP161 technical data





RS232No


Max. 115.2 kBaud

Application Interface IF2Electrical IsolationDesignStation NumberDistanceMax. Baudrate

Bus Length 10 - 60 mBus Length 100 -200 mBus Length 800 -1,000 m

CANYes

9 pin D-type plugCan be set using two node number switches

Max. 1,000 m500 kBit/s250 kBit/s50 kBit/s


RS232No

9 pin D-type plug, bus adapter requiredMax. 15 m / 19200 Baud

Max. 115.2 kBaud

Potentiometer Voltage Outputs

Number and Type of Potentiometer Voltages 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block

Electrical Isolation to PLC Yes

Output Current ±80 mA (simultaneously)

Maximum Output Power 1.6 W

Analog Inputs

Number of Inputs 6

Input Signal, Nominal ±10 V


Input Impedance in Signal RangeStaticDynamic

2 MΩ3 kW / 10 nF

Isolation Voltage between Input and Bus ±50 V

Analog Outputs

Number of Outputs 6 voltage outputs ±10 V



Output Response when Power Supply is Switched On/Off

An enable relay is switched on at a defined value of 0 V Basic setting = short circuit on the output terminals using relay contact

Isolation Voltage between Output and Bus ±50 V

Repeat Precision at a Certain Temperature after Specified Stabilizing Time

±2 LSB(noise at constant temperature in 24 hours)

Digital inputs

Number of Inputs Up to 12Configuration as input or output takes place in groups of two using software

Rated Voltage +24 VDC

Rated Frequency Max. 200 kHz (symmetrical square wave)

Wiring Sink

Limits0-Signal UL0-Signal IL

≤5 V≤2 mA

Delay 0 to 1 ≤2.5 µs

Delay 1 to 0 ≤2.5 µs

Power Consumption (external)Per Group at 24 V (no load)Per Digital Input at 24 V

≤0.48 W0.24 W

Interrupt Capable YesParameters can be set using LTX functions - each digital input can trigger an IRQ

ATTENTION: Handling takes place using an exception task

Isolation Voltage between Input and Bus ±50 V

Digital Outputs

Number and Type of Outputs Up to 12 transistor outputs (Push/Pull) Configuration as input or output takes place in groups of two using software

Product ID IP161

Table 41: IP161 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The programmable I/O processor IP161 has a CPU section, two interfaces, digital and analog I/O. Two features of the IP161 are the interrupt capable digital inputs and the fact that it can be used as intelligent I/O processor and also as CPU. The module recognizes the correct operating mode from the slot used.

The module is usually used as an I/O processor, to reduce the load on the CPU.

The module has three I/O groups, a reset button, status LEDs, two HEX number switches for the CAN bus station number and the connectors for two RS232 interfaces and a CAN interface.

Rated Current (1-Signal) ±100 mA

Rated Voltage +24 VDC

Switching Voltage Range +12 to +35 VDC


Power Consumption per Group (external) ≤20 mA + load current for the outputs

Type of External Protective Circuit For inductive loads, clamping diodes can also be connected between the output and the group supply (24 VDC and GND)

Delay 0 to 1 ≤2 µs for resistive loads

Delay 1 to 0 ≤2 µs for resistive loads

Total Output Current Max. 400 mA/group (static)

Isolation Voltage between Output and Bus ±50 V

Diagram 18: IP161 operational elements and display elements

Product ID IP161

Table 41: IP161 technical data (cont.)



6.8 XP152

6.8.1 Order Data



CPU

3XP152.60-2 2005 CPU, 118 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, power supply module insert

Accessories




0AC913.92 Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable


Table 42: XP152 order data

Product ID XP152

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2005 CPU



Processor Section


SRAMSystem RAMUser RAM

138 KByte118 KByte

FlashPROMSystem PROMUser PROM

512 KByte512 KByte

Data BufferingBackup Battery in 2005 Backplanewith Battery Module AC240Battery Monitoring

Min. 4 yearsMin. 2 years

Yes, when operated as main CPU (starting with Rev. 12.00)

Peripherals


Nonvolatile (external buffering)1 s

Reset Button Yes

Status Display LEDs



RS232No


Max. 64 kBaud

Table 43: XP152 technical data


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The XP152 module is a CPU insert for power supply modules. This means that the CPU does not require its own slot. The module is equipped with a RESET button, status LEDs, two HEX number switches for the CAN bus station number and the connectors for an RS232 and a CAN interface.

Optionally, the XP152 module can be operated as intelligent CAN bus processor together with a CPU (e.g. CP260). In operating mode, the XP152 cannot access local modules on the 2005 unit. It is controlled by the CPU, collects data from the CAN stations (e.g. I/O) and provides this data to the CPU.

Application Interface IF2Electrical IsolationDesignDistanceMax. Baudrate

Bus Length 10 - 60 mBus Length 100 -200 mBus Length 800 -1,000 m

CANYes

9 pin D-type plugMax. 1,000 m

500 kBit/s250 kBit/s50 kBit/s

Diagram 19: XP152 operational elements and display elements

Product ID XP152

Table 43: XP152 technical data (cont.)


B&R SYSTEM 2005 • Programmable Modules

7. Programmable Modules

7.1 Overview

Module Description

DM455 2005 digital mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 ms, sink, 8 transistor outputs, 0 to 5 VDC, 1 A, Order terminal blocks separately!

Table 44: Programmable module overview


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


7.2 DM455

7.2.1 Order Data



3DM455.60-2 2005 digital mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 µs, sink, 8 transistor outputs, 0 to 50 VDC, 1 A, Order terminal block separately!





Terminal block is not included in the delivery (see "Accessories").


Product ID DM455

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



YesYes


Inputs

Number of Inputs 8


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Input Frequency Max. 100 kHz, decisively limited by the software

Wiring Sink

Switching ThresholdLOW RangeSwitching RangeHIGH Range

<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V

Applications Encoder evaluation, signal measurement, high-speed signal processing

Delay 0 to 1 Max. 2.5 µs

Delay 1 to 0 Max. 2.5 µs

Electrical IsolationInput - PLCInput - Output

Yes (optocoupler)Yes (optocoupler)

Outputs

Number of Outputs 8

Design Transistor




Supply Voltage 0 - 50 VDC

Supply Voltage Range+ to ground- to ground

Max. +70 VDCMax. -70 VDC

Product ID DM455

Continuous Current per OutputPush, Pull, Push/PullMotor Operation

Max. 1 AMax. 1 A per winding

Protective CircuitInternalExternal

YesGenerally required (fuse)



Switching Frequency (resistive load) Max. 100 kHz, decisively limited by the software

Electrical IsolationOutput - PLCOutput - Input




Product ID DM455



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005




Digital input modules convert binary process signals into the internal signal level required by the PLC. The states of the digital inputs are shown with status LEDs.

The distinguishing features relevant for the input modules are:


• Input voltage



8.2 Input Filter


Diagram 20: Input filter for digital input modules



8.3 Sink/Source Connections

Most 24 VDC B&R SYSTEM 2005 input modules can be either wired as sink or source circuits. The inputs on a module are normally separated in electrically isolated groups of four inputs, therefore each group can be wired differently.

In a sink circuit (current consumer for the sensor), the COM connection for an input group is connected to signal ground and the inputs are connected to sensors that switch to 24 V.

In a source circuit (current supplier for the sensor), the COM connection for an input group is connected to +24 VDC and the inputs are connected to sensors that switch to signal ground.

8.4 Overview

Diagram 21: Sink/Source Connections

Module DI450 DI475 DI476 DI477 DI486 DI695

Number of Inputs 16 16 16 32 32 16

Input Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 / 230 VAC

Input Delay 1 ms (inputs 1 - 8)10 ms (inputs 9 -16)

10 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 50 ms

Remarks Inputs 1 - 4: Counter inputsInputs 5 - 6: Gate

measurement

Connection:D-type connector

Connection:Terminal block

Table 47: Digital input module overview


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


8.5 DI450

8.5.1 Order Data



3DI450.60-9 2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms or 10 ms, sink or sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups, 4 counter inputs, 100 kHz, gate time or period measurement,Order terminal block separately!







Product ID DI450

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes




164

Design of the InputsChannels 1 - 4Channels 5 -6Channels 7 -16

8 bit counterGate, period measurement (starting with Rev. 30.00)

Digital inputs

WiringGroups 1 + 2 (inputs 1 - 8)Groups 3 +4 (inputs 9 - 16)

SinkSink or source

Input VoltageNominalMaximum

24 VDC30 VDC

Input Currentat 24 VDCat 30 VDC

Approx. 8 mAApprox. 10 mA

Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ


<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V




Switching DelayInputs 1 -8TypicalMax.

Inputs 9 -16TypicalMax.

1 ms1.2 ms

10 ms12 ms

Counter InputsInputsCounter SizeCount Frequency

1 - 48 bit (individual) 1)

Max. 100 kHz

Gate MeasurementChannelsGate FrequencyGate Pause

5 and 6Max. 10 kHz

>50 ms

Period MeasurementChannelsInput Frequency

5 and 6Max. 10 kHz



Electrical IsolationInput - PLCGroup - GroupInput - Input(same group)


No



1) Counter inputs 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 can be linked together as a 16 bit counter.

Product ID DI450



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


8.6 DI475 / DI476

8.6.1 Order Data



3DI475.6 2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately!







Table 50: DI475 / DI476 order data

Product ID DI475 DI476

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes




164

164



24 VDC30 VDC


Input Resistance 4.8 kW


<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V

Switching DelayTypicalMax.

10 ms12 ms

1 ms1.2 ms


Table 51: DI475 / DI476 technical data




Electrical IsolationInput - PLCGroup - GroupInput - Input(same group)


No






Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


8.7 DI477

8.7.1 Order Data



3DI477.6 2005 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source,8 electrically isolated input groups



Product ID DI477

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes




324



24 VDC30 VDC




<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V


1 ms1.2 ms



Electrical IsolationInput - PLCGroup - GroupInput - Input (same group)


No






8.8 DI486

8.8.1 Order Data



3DI486.6 2005 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source,2 electrically isolated input groups, Order TB718 terminal blocks separately!







Product ID DI486

General Information



YesYes




3216



24 VDC30 VDC


Input Resistance 6 kΩ


<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V


0.5 ms1 ms





No





Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


8.9 DI695

8.9.1 Order Data



3DI695.6 2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 120/230 VAC, 50 ms, 2 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately!







Product ID DI695

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



Number of Inputs 16

Rated Voltage 120 / 230 VAC

Rated Frequency 50 / 60 Hz

Limits0-Signal ULow0-Signal ILow

Max. 40 VACMax. 15 mA

Delay 0 to 1 Max. 50 ms


Power ConsumptionInternalExternal

Max. 1.5 WMax. 4 W


Isolation Voltage under Normal Operating Conditions between Channel and Bus

2500 VAC

Different Circuits Possible Yes, but not different phases








Digital output modules are used to control external loads (relays, motors, solenoids). The states of the digital outputs are indicated by status LEDs.

The distinguishing features relevant for output modules are:

• Number of Outputs

• Type (relays, transistors, triacs)

• Switching Voltage

• Continuous Current

9.2 Protective Circuit

The transistor output modules DO479 and DO480 have overload protection and an internal protective circuit for overload peaks or reverse polarity. The braking voltage allows fast switching of inductive loads without external inverse diodes.

Relays and triac output modules have external overload protection (fuse).

9.3 Overview

Module DO479 DO480 DO650 DO690 DO750 DO760

Number of Outputs 16 16 16 8 8 8

Design Transistor Transistor Relay Triac Relay Relay

Switching Voltage

Min. 19.5 VDC 0 VDC 30 VAC

Nom. 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 VAC / 24 VDC 120 VAC 230 VAC / 24 VDC 30 VDC / 240 VAC

Max. 30 VDC 48 VDC 144 VAC / 30 VDC 144 VAC 250 VAC / 30 VDC 125 VDC / 264 VAC

Continuous Current per

Output Max. 0.5 A Max. 2 A Max. 2 A Max. 1 A Max. 3 A Max. 4 A

Group Max. 4 A Max. 12 A Max. 8 A Max. 2 A Max. 8 A

Module Max. 8 A Max. 24 A Max. 32 A Max. 4 A Max. 16 A Max. 32 A

Table 58: Digital output module overview


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


9.4 DO479 / DO480

9.4.1 Order Data



3DO479.6 2005 digital output module, 16 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately!

3DO480.6 2005 digital output module, 16 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 2 A,2 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately!






Table 59: DO479 / DO480 order data

Product ID DO479 DO480

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



Number of OutputsTotalin 2 Groups of

168

Design Transistor



0 VDC24 VDC48 VDC

Continuous Current per OutputGroupModule

Max. 0.5 AMax. 4 AMax. 8 A

Max. 2 AMax. 12 A1)

Max. 24 A

Leakage Current when Switched Off 0.3 mA 0.1 mA

Switching Capacity of Filament Lamps --- 15 W / 24 V

Power ConsumptionInternalTerminal Side at 24 V

Max. 1 WMax. 2 W per Group

Max. 2.5 W



YesOnly if necessary (surge)

Table 60: DO479 / DO480 technical data




Switching Delaylog. 0 - log. 1 (typ./max.)log. 1 - log. 0 (typ./max.)

5 µs / 110 µs60 µs / 100 µs

4 µs / 120 µs100 µs / 120 µs

Switching Frequency (resistive load) Max. 500 Hz


Electrical IsolationOutput - PLCGroup - GroupOutput - Output

YesYesNo



1) Simultaneousness factor = 75 %, maximum 12 of the 16 outputs can be fully loaded at the same time.


Table 60: DO479 / DO480 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


9.5 DO650 / DO750

9.5.1 Order Data



3DO650.6 2005 digital output module, 16 relay outputs 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A, 4 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately!









General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



Number of OutputsTotalin 4/2 Groups of

164

84

Design Relay / N.O.


120 VAC / 24 VDC144 VAC / 30 VDC

230 VAC / 24 VDC250 VAC / 30 VDC


Max. 2 AMax. 8 A

Max. 32 A

Max. 3 AMax. 8 A

Max. 16 A

Switching CapacityMinimumMaximum

0.1 mA / 0.1 VDC300 VA / 90 W

10 mA / 5 VDC500 VA / 150 W

Switching Frequency (nominal load) Max. 10 Hz

Power Consumption Max. 4 W Max. 3 W


Short Circuit Protection (external) Fuse 8 A slow-blow per group (COM connection)

External Protective Circuit Generally required


Switching Delaylog. 0 - log. 1 (typ./max.)log. 1 - log. 0 (typ./max.)

5.6 ms / 10 ms2.5 ms / 5 ms

4 ms / 6 ms6 ms / 8 ms






Yes / max. 144 VACYes / max. 250 VAC

No

Yes / max. 250 VACYes / max. 430 VAC

No






Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


9.6 DO690

9.6.1 Order Data



3DO690.6 2005 digital output module, 8 triac outputs 120 VAC, 1 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately!







Product ID DO690

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes




84

Design Triac



Switching Voltage Frequency 45 to 63 Hz


Max. 1 AMax. 2 A (simultaneousness factor = 50%) 1)

Max. 4 A

Leakage Current 4 mA (resistive load)


Max. 1.5 WMax. 6 W (simultaneousness factor = 50%) 1)


Overload ProtectionInternalExternal

YesBy user


YesGenerally required (fuse)





Switching Delay, Switching Voltage Frequencylog. 0 - log. 1 log. 1 - log. 0

50 Hz10 ms10 ms

60 Hz8.5 ms8.5 ms




Yes (optotriac)Yes (optotriac)

No



1) Simultaneousness factor = 50 %, maximum 4 of 8 outputs are allowed to be fully loaded at the same time.

Product ID DO690



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


9.7 DO760

9.7.1 Order Data



3DO760.6 2005 digital output module, 8 relay outputs 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A, single channel isolated outputs, Order terminal block separately!







Product ID DO760

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



Number and Type of Outputs 4 change-over contacts / 4 normally open contacts, single channel isolation is provided

Rated Voltage 30 VDC / 240 VAC

Switching Voltage Range Min. 5 VDC at 1 mA

Rated Frequency DC or 45 - 63 Hz

Rated Current (1-Signal) 4 A (resistive load)

Switching Capacity 2000 VA; 120 W at 30 VDC (resistive load)

Wiring 4 change-over contacts / 4 normally open contacts


Max. 4 WMax. 4 W


Type of Protection

Short Circuit ProtectionACDC

Overvoltage Protection for Contacts

DC Connection

Fuse 8 A slow-blow (required externally)Fuse 4 A slow-blow (required externally)

Limited to 460 V (required externally)

Spark protection as required (to be connected externally)





Output Delay for Signal Changes fromlog 0 - log 1log 1 - log 0

Max. 13 ms (including chatter time)Max. 16 ms (including chatter time)


Total Output CurrentFollowing Condition must be FulfilledCable Cross Section

Max. 32 AΣ In² ≤200

2.5 mm², for currents ≥ 4 A or if a recommanded value is reached

Isolation Voltages under NormalOperating Conditions between Channel and Bus

1 min 2800 VAC or 4 kV with 1.2 x 50 µs pulse

Different Phases Possible Yes, but only for 110 VAC



Product ID DO760



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


10. Digital Mixed Modules


Digital mixed modules are a combination of digital input and output modules.

The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status LEDs.

10.2 Overview

Module DM476

Number of Inputs 16



Switching Voltage 24 VDC


Table 67: Digital mixed module overview



10.3 DM476

10.3.1 Order Data



3DM476.6 2005 digital mixed module, 16 inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC, 1 ms, DC: sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups, 16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.4 A



Product ID DM476

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



YesYes


Max. 2.5 WMax. 2 W

Inputs 25 pin D-type socket (upper)


164


24 VDC / 24 VAC30 VDC / 30 VAC




<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V





No

Outputs 25 pin D-type plug (lower)




Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


Design Transistor


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Max. 0.4 AMax. 4.8 A1)

Leakage Current when Switched Off 0.3 mA







YesNo



1) Simultaneousness factor = 75 %, maximum 12 of the 16 outputs can be fully loaded at the same time.

Product ID DM476







In the PLC, analog data is always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. Therefore, the resolution of the module used does not have to be taken into consideration when creating an application program.

All analog input modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D converter is active.

11.2 Overview



Input Signal ±10 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA




Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


11.3 AI350 / AI375 / AI775

11.3.1 Order Data



3AI350.6 2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!

3AI375.6 2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!

3AI775.6 2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!






Table 71: AI350 / AI375 / AI775 order data

Product ID AI350 AI375 AI775

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



Number of Inputs 8

Input SignalNominalMin./Max.

-10 to +10 V-20 to +20 V

0 to +10 V-20 to +20 V

0 to 20 mA -50 to +50 mA


Data Format Delivered to the Application Program

16 bit 2s complement $8000 - $7FF0

16 bit 2s complement $0000 - $7FF8

16 bit 2s complement$0000 - $7FF8

Input Impedance in Signal Range 2 MΩ 2 MΩ 50 Ω



Isolation Voltage between Channel and Bus under Normal Operating Conditions

±50 V



Table 72: AI350 / AI375 / AI775 technical data





Analog output modules convert PLC internal numerical values into voltages or currents. The numbers to be converted must be in 16 bit 2s complement. The conversion takes place independent of the resolution of the output module used.

All analog output modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the D/A converter is active.

12.2 Overview

Module AO350 AO775


Output Signal ±10 V 0 to 20 mA

Digital Converter Resolution 12 Bit 11 Bit

Table 73: Analog Output Module Overview


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


12.3 AO350 / AO775

12.3.1 Order Data



3AO350.6 2005 analog output module, 8 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!

3AO775.6 2005 analog output module, 8 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 11 bit, Order terminal block separately!






Table 74: AO350 / AO775 order data

Product ID AO350 AO775

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



Number of Outputs 8

Output Signal -10 to +10 V 0 to 20 mA


Max. Load per Output ±10 mA (load ≥1 kΩ)

Load Impedance Max. 600 Ω

Power Consumption Max. 5 W Max. 5.5 W



YesNo



Table 75: AO350 / AO775 technical data


B&R SYSTEM 2005 • Analog Mixed Modules

13. Analog Mixed Modules


Analog mixed modules are a combination of analog input and output modules.

All analog mixed modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the D/A and A/D converters are active.

13.2 Overview

Module AM050 AM051 AM055 AM374

Number of Inputs 4 4 5 4

Input Signal 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA 1)

1) Can be switched in groups of 2

Number of Outputs 4 4 3 4

Output Signal ±10 V 0 to 20 mA ±10 V ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA 1)

Digital Converter Resolution 12 Bit 12 Bit 12 Bit 12 Bit

Table 76: Analog mixed module overview


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


13.3 AM050

13.3.1 Order Data


Description refers to modules with Rev. 50.00 and higher.


3AM050.6 2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, 4 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!






Table 77: AM050 order data

Product ID AM050

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



InputsInput Signal

4 0 - 10 V

OutputsOutput Signal

4 ±10 V




±50 V

Analog Inputs


0 to +10 V -20 to +20 V


Input Impedance in Signal Range 2 MΩ

Analog Outputs



Load Impedance Min. 1 kΩ

Table 78: AM050 technical data



Switch On/Off Behavior Internal enable relay during boot procedure or error: closed



Product ID AM050



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


13.4 AM051

13.4.1 Order Data


Description refers to modules with Rev. 50.00 and higher.


3AM051.6 2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, 4 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!







Product ID AM051

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



InputsInput Signal

4 0 - 20 mA


40 - 20 mA




±50 V

Analog Inputs


0 to 20 mA-50 to +50 mA


Input Impedance in Signal Range 50 Ω

Analog Outputs

Output Signal 0 - 20 mA


Load Impedance Max. 600 Ω







Product ID AM051



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


13.5 AM055

13.5.1 Order Data



3AM055.6 2005 analog mixed module, 5 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, 3 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 1 potentiometer voltage +10 V, 2 potentiometer voltage terminals, Order terminal block separately!







Product ID AM055

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



InputsInput Signal

5 0 -10 V


3 ±10 V

Potentiometer Voltage +10 V




±50 V

Analog Inputs


0 to +10 V -20 to +20 V



Analog Outputs








Potentiometer Voltage

Output Voltage +10 V

Load 4 x 1 kW parallel, total of max. 40 mA

Short Circuit Current >100 mA



Product ID AM055

Table 82: AM055 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


13.6 AM374

13.6.1 Order Data



3AM374.6 2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0-10 V / 0-20 mA, 12 bit, 4 outputs, +/- 10 V / 0-20 mA, 12 bit, signals can be set in groups of 2, Order terminal block separately!







Product ID AM374

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



InputsInput SignalGroup 1Group 2

40 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, can be switched in groups of 2

Channels 1 + 2Channels 3 + 4


Group 1Group 2

4 ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA, can be switched in groups of 2

Channels 1 + 2Channels 3 + 4




±50 V

Analog Inputs - Voltage


0 to +10 V -20 to +20 V



Analog Inputs - Current


0 to 20 mA-50 to +50 mA





Input Impedance in Signal Range 50 Ω

Analog Outputs - Voltage





Analog Outputs - Current

Output Signal 0 - 20 mA


Load Impedance Max. 600 W




Product ID AM374

Table 84: AM374 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005






For temperature measurements, the temperature module returns the measured value in 0.1 ° steps. That means a result of 750 corresponds to 75.0 °C. The data format 0.1 °C is supported by all temperature modules as standard. Some temperature modules can also be switched to other formats.

All temperature modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D converter is active.

14.2 Overview

Module AT350 AT450 AT660


Measurement Range -50 to +450 °C -50 to +450 °C -200 to +950 °C-200 to +1,300 °C

Sensor PT100 / 3-line PT100 / 4-line FeCuNi / Type J + LNiCrNi/Type K

Resolution 13500 Steps 13500 Steps 23841 Steps

Table 85: Temperature Module Overview



14.3 AT350 / AT450

14.3.1 Order Data



3AT350.6 2005 analog input module, 4 inputs, PT100 (3-line connection),-50 to +450 degrees C, Order terminal block separately!

3AT450.6 2005 Analog Input Module, 4 inputs, PT100 (4-line connection), -50 to +450 degrees C, Order terminal block separately!






Table 86: AT350 / AT450 order data

Product ID AT350 AT450

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



Number of Inputs 4 inputs for resistance measurement


PT1003-line connection

IEC/EN 60751


IEC/EN 60751

Measurement Range -50 to +450 °C

Internal Resolution 13500 Steps

Measurement Current 2.5 mA (±0.2 %)




YesNo



Table 87: AT350 / AT450 technical data


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



Scan Order

The modules AT350 and AT450 offer the possibility to change the scan order. Individual channels can be scanned and converted more often in order to better register fast thermal changes (e.g. heating cartridges).

Data Format

In addition to the 1/10 °C data format, the formats 1/10 °F and 1/100 °C are provided and can be selected in the application software.



14.4 AT660

14.4.1 Order Data



3AT660.6 2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, temperature sensor type L/J/K, -200 to +1300 degrees C, Order terminal block separately!







Product ID AT660

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


YesYes



Number of Inputs 8 differential inputs for thermocouples

Input GroupsGroup 1Group 2

2 groupsChannels 1 - 4Channels 5 - 8

Input SignalNominalAllowed

-15 to +55 mV-20 to +20 V

Digital Converter Resolution Internal >14 bit 1)

Input Impedance in Signal Range >1 MΩ


Sensor

Setting Individually for each group

Type FeCuNi FeCuNi NiCrNi

Type L J K

Standard DIN 43710 DIN IEC 584 DIN IEC 584

Measurement Voltage Range 2) -8.15 to 53.14 mV -7.89 to 54.95 mV -5.891 to 52.398 mV

Measurement Range -200.0 to +900.0 °C -200.0 to +950.0 °C -200.0 to +1,300.0 °C

Step Size 0.1 °C

Linearization Yes



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


Compensation MeasurementInternalExternal

-20 to +80 °C-100 to +200 °C adjustable

Raw Value Measurement

Standardization Standardized to 2 µV 3)

Measurement Voltage Range -15 to +55 mV

Measurement Range in Steps of 0.1 °C Depends on sensor type

Linearization in CPU


Can be read ----


Isolation Voltage under NormalOperating Conditions between Channel and Bus

±50 V



1) The internal resolution is different depending on the measurement time, but the converter value is always scaled to 20 ms. This prevents a value from being changed when themeasurement time is changed!

2) Standardized to 0 °C compensation temperature.3) Voltage standardized to 2 µV starting with rev. xx.01.

Product ID AT660





15.1 Overview

Module Description

IF050 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422, network capable, 1 RS232/TTY interface, all interfaces are electrically isolated

IF060 2005 interface module, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts

IF613 2005 interface module, 3 RS232 interfaces, CPU and IF module insert

IF621 2005 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable, CPU and IF module insert

IF622 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 RS485/RS422 interfaces: electrical isolation, network capable,CPU and IF module insert

IF661 2005 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, CPU and IF module insert

IF671 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and IF module insert

IF672 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 CAN interfaces, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable,CPU and IF module insert

IF681.95 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket

IF681.96 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket

NW150 2005 PROFIBUS network module, electrically isolated RS485 interface used to connect to PROFIBUS networks



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


15.2 IF050

15.2.1 Order Data



Interface module

3IF050.6 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422, network capable, 1 RS232/TTY interfaces, all interafes are electrically isolated

Accessories






Product ID IF050

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



YesNo


Processor Section

Processor Type RISC

Dual Ported RAM (DPR) 576 bytes


Electrical IsolationInterface - PLCInterface - Interface

YesYes

Data Formats 1)

Data BitsParityStop Bits

5 to 8 yes / no / even / odd

1 / 1.5 / 2

Application Interface IF1

Type RS232


Input Filter / Protective Circuit Yes

Maximum Distance 15 m / 19200 Baud

Maximum Baudrate 1) 64 kBaud

Handshake Lines DCD, DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS, RI

Network Capable No

Table 92: IF Technical Data




Type RS232/TTY 1)



Product ID IF050

Maximum DistanceRS232TTY

15 m / 19200 Baud 300 m

Maximum Baudrate 1)

RS232TTY

64 kBaud2.4 kBaud

Handshake LinesRS232TTY

RTS, CTS ----

Network Capable No


Type RS485/RS422 1)



Maximum Distance 1200 m (without repeater)

Maximum Baudrate 1) 347 kBaud

Network Capable Yes



Product ID IF050

Table 92: IF Technical Data (cont.)


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


15.3 IF060

15.3.1 Order Data



The interface module IF060 has an insert slot for interface modules.

Therefore, the IF060 allows every B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPU to integrate different bus or network systems in the B&R SYSTEM 2005 via the system bus.

The interface data must be prepared in the CPU. The IF060 module provides the physical connection to the insert modules.

Multiple IF060 interface modules can be inserted on the main backplane as required. The maximum number of IF060 modules that can be used depends on the type of interface module inserted, the baudrate used and the performance of the CPU.


3IF060.6 2005 interface module, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts

The following interface module inserts can be used with the IF060:









Product ID IF060

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



YesNo






15.4 IF613

15.4.1 Order Data



The IF613 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060.

The module is equipped with three RS232 interfaces and is used to connect several peripheral devices which cannot be networked (modem, printer, barcode reader, terminals, etc.).


Interface module

3IF613.9 2005 interface module, 3 RS232 interfaces, CPU and IF module insert

Accessories



Product ID IF613

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Slot Insert in CP260, IF260, IF060


Application Interfaces IF1, IF2 and IF3

Type RS232

Controller UART Type ST16C654

FIFO 64 bytes in send and receive direction





Maximum Baudrate 115.2 kBaud

Handshake Lines IF1: DTR, DSR, RTS, CTSIF2 and IF3: RTS, CTS

Network Capable No



1 / 2



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


15.5 IF621

15.5.1 Order Data



Interface module

3IF621.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, 1 CAN interface, both are electrically isolated and network capable, CPU and IF module insert

Accessories





Product ID IF621

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Type RS485/RS422




Electrical Isolation IF1 - PLC Yes

Electrical Isolation IF1 - IF2 Yes




Network Capable Yes



Type CAN

Controller Controller 82527

Design 4 pin multipoint connector

Electrical Isolation IF2 - PLC Yes

Electrical Isolation IF1 - IF2 Yes






The IF621 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with an RS485/RS422 interface and a CAN interface.

The RS485/RS422 interface is used mostly for visualization and networking based on different protocols (e.g. NET2000).

Maximum BaudrateBus Length 10 - 60 mBus Length 100 -200 mBus Length 800 -1,000 m


Network Capable Yes

Bus Termination Resistor Optional (externally wired)

Product ID IF621



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


15.6 IF622

15.6.1 Order Data



Interface module

3IF622.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 RS485/RS422 interfaces: electrically isolated, network capable, insert forCPU and IF modules

Accessories

0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, online cable

0AC916.9 Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC



Product ID IF622

General Information





Type RS232








Handshake Lines DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS

Network Capable No



1 / 2

Application Interfaces IF2 and IF3

Type RS485/RS422










The IF622 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and two RS485/RS422 interfaces.



Network Capable Yes

Connection Via active RS485 bus termination (model number 0AC916.9)

Bus Termination Resistor External, integrated in active RS485 bus termination

Product ID IF622



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


15.7 IF661

15.7.1 Order Data




The module is equipped with an electrically isolated RS485 interface. The PROFIBUS-DP format is used as transfer protocol. Therefore, a B&R 2005 PLC can be connected as a slave in a PROFIBUS-DP network.


Interface module

3IF661.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, CPU and IF module insert

Accessories





Product ID IF661

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Type RS485

Controller ASIC SPC3

RAM 1.5 KByte

Transfer Protocol PROFIBUS-DP





Maximum BaudrateBus Length <100 mBus Length <200 mBus Length <400 mBus Length <1,000 m

12 MBit/s 1.5 MBit/s 500 kBit/s

187.5 kBit/s

Network Capable Yes





15.8 IF671

15.8.1 Order Data



Interface module

3IF671.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and IF module insert

Accessories






Product ID IF671

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Type RS232









Network Capable No



1 / 2


Type RS485/RS422






Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005




The module is equipped with an RS232 interface, an RS485/RS422 interface and a CAN interface.

Electrical IsolationIF1 - PLCIF1 - IF2

YesYes




Network Capable Yes



Type CAN





Maximum BaudrateBus Length 10 - 60 mBus Length 100 - 200 mBus Length 800 - 1,000 m


Network Capable Yes


CAN Node Number Can be set using software

Product ID IF671




15.9 IF672

15.9.1 Order Data



Interface module

3IF672.9 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 CAN interfaces, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and IF module insert

Accessories




Product ID IF672

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Type RS232









Network Capable No



1 / 2

Application Interfaces IF2 and IF3

Type CAN


Design 2 x 4 pin multipoint connector

Electrical Isolationto PLCBetween Interfaces

YesYes



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The IF672 interface module can be operated in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260 / IF060. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces.


Maximum BaudrateBus Length 10 - 60 mBus Length 100 - 200 mBus Length 800 - 1,000 m


Network Capable Yes


Product ID IF672




15.10 IF681.95

15.10.1 Order Data



Interface Modules

3IF681.95 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, with 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket

Accessories


Table 107: IF681.95 order data

Product ID IF681.95

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Slot Insert in CP260, IF260



Type RS232









Network Capable No



1 / 2


Type ETHERNET

Controller Controller AM79C960

Send and receive buffer 128 KByte

Table 108: IF681.95 technical data


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The IF681.95 interface module can be used in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and an ETHERNET interface. The ETHERNET connection is made using a 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket.

Design 10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket


Maximum Baudrate 10 MBit/s

Bus Capable Yes

Product ID IF681.95

Table 108: IF681.95 technical data (cont.)



15.11 IF681.96

15.11.1 Order Data



Interface module

3IF681.96 2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, with 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket

Accessories


Table 109: IF681.96 order data

Product ID IF681.96

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Slot Insert in CP260, IF260



Type RS232









Network Capable No



1 / 2


Type ETHERNET

Controller Controller AM79C960

Send and receive buffer 128 KByte

Design 10BASE-T: Twisted Pair RJ45 socket

Table 110: IF681.96 technical data


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The IF681.96 interface module can be used in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in the IF260. The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and an ETHERNET interface. The ETHERNET connection is made with a 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket.


Maximum Baudrate 10 MBit/s

Bus Capable Yes

Product ID IF681.96

Table 110: IF681.96 technical data (cont.)



15.12 NW150

15.12.1 Order Data



PROFIBUS network module

3NW150.60-1 2005 PROFIBUS network module, electrically isolated RS485 interface used to connect to PROFIBUS networks

Accessories




Table 111: NW150 order data

Product ID NW150

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



YesNo


Peripherals

Diagnosis LEDs Yes

Number Switch Two used to set the station address and one to set the baudrate



9.6 kBit/s19.2 kBit/s93.75 kBit/s187.5 kBit/s500 kBit/s



Max. 1,200 mMax. 1,200 mMax. 1,200 mMax. 1,000 mMax. 400 m

PROFIBUS DataTransfer ProtocolAccess ProcedureNumber of StationsTopologyCoupling to BusTransfer Media

According to PROFIBUS standard, DIN 19245 parts 1 and 2 Token passing principle with underlying master/slave principle

Max. 127 (with repeater) Physical bus


Table 112: NW150 technical data


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



16.1 Overview

Module Description

NC150 2005 counter module, 2 inputs for incremental encoder, 32 bit, input frequency 100 kHz, encoder supply 5 to 30 VDC, 2 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 8 pin terminal block included with delivery!

NC154 2005 axis controller, 3 axes, Each of the 3 axes has the following data: input frequency 150 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 5 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC / 24 VDC, 1 A, 1 analog output +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order 12 pin terminal block separately!

NC157 2005 positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs 24 VDC, sink, 4 pin terminal block included in the delivery!




16.2 NC150

16.2.1 Order Data



3NC150.6 2005 counter module, 2 inputs for incremental encoder, 32 bit, input frequency 100 kHz, encoder supply 5 to 30 VDC, 2 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 8 pin terminal block included with delivery!



Product ID NC150

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



YesYes

Status Display LEDs


Encoder 1 and 2

Design of the Signal Encoder Connections Two 9 pin D-type sockets

Encoder Inputs Symmetric and asymmetric


YesNo

Encoder SupplyModule Requirements

5 to 30 V externalTyp. 40 mA at 5 V / 120 mA at 30 V

Input Filter 2 times can be set using software

Input FrequencyShort Filter TimeLong Filter Time

Max. 100 kHz Max. 20 kHz

Counter Frequency with 4-fold Evaluation Max. 400 kHz

Phase Offset between Counter Channels A and B 90° ±45°

CounterAmountCounter SizeOperating Modes 1)

2 32 Bit

Incremental (4-fold, 2-fold and 1-fold evaluation) up/down counter

Analog Outputs

Amount 2

Output Voltage -10 V to +10 V



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The counter module NC150 is designed for externally supplied incremental encoders. The supply voltage is connected using two terminal blocks. Internally, it is directly connected to the 9 pin D-type sockets used for both encoder connections. The encoder supply is passed on to the encoders using two pins on the D-type sockets.

Two analog outputs (±10 V, 12 bit resolution) are also provided to control servo drives.

16.2.4 Signal Encoder

The following encoders, as well as others, can be connected to the NC 150 counter module:

• 5 V encoder with differential outputs (symmetrical encoder)

• Asymmetrical encoder with transistor outputs

• Symmetrical encoder with transistor outputs

• Encoder with open collector outputs (external pull-up resistors must be connected when using this type of encoder)


Max. Load per Output ±10 mA (load ≥1 kΩ)

Electrical IsolationOutput - PLCOutput - OutputCounter Channels - Analog Outputs

YesNoYes



1) Can be set using software.

Product ID NC150




16.3 NC154

16.3.1 Order Data



Axis Controller

3NC154.60-2 2005 axis controller, 3 axes, Each of the 3 axes has the following data: input frequency 150 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32 bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 5 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC / 24 VDC, 1 A, 1 analog output +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order 12 pin terminal block separately!


Software

1A3502.01 2005 Positioning Software, NC154.60-2 standard operating system

Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "Accessories").



Product ID NC154

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



YesNo

RAM 2 MByte DRAM

System PROM 2 MByte FlashPROM

NC154 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules Supported by

CP260, IF260

Status Display LEDs

Number of Axes 3



Encoder Input - Entries are Valid for all Three Axes

General Information Connection using 15 pin D-type socket, incremental or SSI absolute encoder(both electrically isolated)

Incremental EncoderSignal FormEvaluationInput FrequencyCount FrequencyCounter SizeInputsInput LevelDistance between EdgesMonitoring

Square wave pulse 4-fold

Max. 150 kHzMax. 600 kHz

32 Bit A, A\, B, B\, R, R\

5 V (differential input)Min. 0.8 µs

Broken Connection, Signal Disturbance



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The axis controller NC154 is an active axis module, which includes all functions for operating three servo axes:

• Encoder input

• Servo output (±10 V, 12 bit)

• Closed loop position controller (digital sampling controller)

• Limit and reference switch inputs

• Input "Controller Ready"

• Output "Enable Controller"

In addition, three fast trigger inputs are provided to latch the actual position for measurements.

16.3.4 Positioning Software

The software for axis control is found in the axis controller FlashPROM. The software can be downloaded. Therefore, the positioning software can be updated, if necessary.

16.3.5 Closed Loop Controller

The NC154 axis controller has a lag free predictable PI closed loop controller. This algorithm guarantees a high degree of dynamic rigidity and excellent path precision.

16.3.6 Positioning Types

The user has a choice between several types of positioning:

• Online Positioning

Changing the variable values for the state of a movement (position, speed and acceleration) is possible at any sampling instant.

• Electronic Gears

One or more gear axes have a certain relationship to a reference axis. The gear ratio and the angles of the gear axes to each other can be changed during a movement. The gear relationship or axes coupling (turning gear axes on and off) is possible when the movement is stopped.

SSI Absolute EncoderCodingWord SizeBaudrateData Input LevelClock Output LevelMonitoring

Gray, binaryMax. 31 Bit230 kBaud

5 V (differential signal)5 V (differential signal)

Signal Disturbance, Parity, Plausibility

Encoder SupplyExt. Input VoltageLoad at Output Level

5 VDC24 VDC

Protection

24 VDC

Max. 400 mA per axisMax. 250 mA per axis

Short Circuit and Overload Protection

Servo Output - Entries are Valid for all Three Axes

Output VoltageMaximum LoadResolutionOutput FilterDisturbance Suppression

±10 V, electrically isolated5 mA 12 Bit

Low pass 1st orderDisturbance compensation

Digital Inputs - Entries are Valid for all Three Axes

AmountElectrical IsolationInput VoltageInput Current

5Yes (optocoupler)

24 VDCApprox. 10 mA

Digital Output - Entries are Valid for all Three Axes

TypeSwitching VoltageSwitching CurrentShort Circuit Protection

Relay30 V

Max. 1 ASoldered fuse 1.5 A

Product ID NC154




• Electronic Cam Profile

Electronic cam profiles allow a non-linear connection between two drives (coupling functions) to be easily created. Several cam profiles can exist on the NC154 at the same time and they can be switched when needed. Up and down synchronization is also possible when the reference axis is not stopped. All limits are taken into consideration during this procedure (speed, acceleration).

Other Applications:

• Flying Saw

- Optimized timing for movements

- Immediate return when cut is completed

• Cross Cutter

- Optimized movement

- Print mark control

• Interpolation

- Extensive NC Interpreter

- Linear, circular and helix interpolation with tangential axis

- Dynamic "Look Ahead"

- Gantry Axes

- Real-time intervention using virtual axes

• Axis Synchronization

- Real-time positioning

- Varied synchronization conditions

• Virtual Axes

- Virtual master

- Real-time intervention in active processes (to superimpose real axes)

• Remote Axes

- Distributed axis controller according to machine functions

- Connected via field bus

16.3.7 CNC Functions

Languages

In addition to the standard DIN 66025 syntax, the user is also provided very useful language expansions. Therefore, statements such as IF, ELSE, WHILE, SWITCH or arithmetic and trigonometric instructions (e.g. +, *, /, sin, cos, arctan) can be used. Up to 1000 R parameters are available as variables.

Interpolation

Straight, circular (helix) with tangential axes, level tool radian correction.

"Look Ahead" Function

A "look ahead" function is implemented which is used to make sure that axes limits are not exceeded.

16.3.8 Object Oriented Axis Programming

Using the new type of object oriented axis programming, tasks can be created quickly and reused. Thoroughly tested, high performance tools are used for this purpose.

The success of this new principle has been indicated by solutions in the main areas of automation technology.


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


16.3.9 NC154 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules

When coupling axes over multiple modules (gears, cams, CNC), the set positions of the master axis are sent to the NC154 modules with the slave axes in an interrupt routine on the main CPU. The interrupt routine is not allowed to be stopped. These requirements are fulfilled by the following CPUs:

• CP260

• IF260 when it is used as a main CPU

16.3.10 Synchronization

If more than one NC154 axes controller is used in a system, the sampling instant can be synchronized by linking the "Sync" connections. This guarantees high precision even when coupling gears between different NC154 modules.



16.4 NC157

16.4.1 Order Data



Axis Controller

3NC157.60-1 2005 positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs, 24 VDC, sink, 4 pin terminal block included in the delivery!

Software

1A3530.01 2005 positioning software, NC157.60-1 standard operating system



Product ID NC157

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



YesNo

RAM 2 MByte DRAM

System PROM 2 MByte FlashPROM

NC157 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules Supported by

CP260, IF260

Status Display LEDs

Number of Axes 8



Servo Interface

Type CAN




Maximum Distance 60 m

Maximum BaudrateBus Lengths up to 60 m 500 kBit/s

Network Capable Yes

Bus Termination Resistor External

CAN Node Number Selection switch



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005



The NC157 axis controller is an active axis module that can be used to control up to eight ACOPOS axes.

16.4.4 Positioning Software

The software for axis control is found in the axis controller FlashPROM. The software can be downloaded. Therefore, the positioning software can be updated, if necessary.

16.4.5 Drive Interface

The NC157 axis controller has a set value generator for each axis which cyclically calculates the set positions. These set positions are transferred to the ACOPOS drives via the CAN network in each NC157 scan step.

16.4.6 Positioning Types

The user has a choice between several types of positioning:

• Online Positioning

Changing the variable values for the state of a movement (position, speed and acceleration) is possible at any sampling instant.

• Electronic Gears

One or more gear axes have a certain relationship to a reference axis. The gear ratio and the angles of the gear axes to each other can be changed during a movement. The gear ratio or axes coupling (turning gear axes on and off) is possible when the movement is stopped.

• Electronic Cam Profile

Electronic cam profiles allow a non-linear connection between two drives (coupling functions) to be easily created. Several cam profiles can exist on the NC157 at the same time and they can be switched when needed. Up and down synchronization is also possible when the reference axis is not stopped. All limits are taken into consideration during this procedure (speed, acceleration).

Other Applications:

• Flying Saw

- Optimized timing for movements

- Immediate return when cut is completed

• Cross Cutter

- Optimized movement

- Print mark control

• Interpolation

- Extensive NC Interpreter

- Linear, circular and helix interpolation with tangential axis

- Dynamic "Look Ahead"

- Gantry Axes

- Real-time intervention using virtual axes

• Axis Synchronization

- Real-time positioning

- Varied synchronization conditions



• Virtual Axes

- Virtual master

- Real-time intervention in active processes (to superimpose real axes)

• Remote Axes

- Distributed axis controller according to machine functions

- Connected via field bus

16.4.7 CNC Functions

Languages

In addition to the standard DIN 66025 syntax, the user is also provided very useful language expansions. Therefore, statements such as IF, ELSE, WHILE, SWITCH or arithmetic and trigonometric instructions (e.g. +, *, /, sin, cos, arctan) can be used. Up to 1000 R parameters are available as variables.

Interpolation

Straight, circular (helix) with tangential axes, level tool radian correction.

"Look Ahead" Function

A "look ahead" function is implemented which is used to make sure that axes limits are not exceeded.

16.4.8 Object Oriented Axis Programming

Using the new type of object oriented axis programming, tasks can be created quickly and reused. Thoroughly tested, high performance tools are used for this purpose.

The success of this new principle has been indicated by solutions in the main areas of automation technology.

16.4.9 Synchronization

If more than one NC157 axes controller is used in a system, the sampling instant can be synchronized by linking the "Sync" connections. This guarantees high precision even when coupling gears between different NC157 modules.

16.4.10 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules

When coupling axes over multiple modules (gears, cams, CNC), the set positions of the master axis are sent to the NC157 modules with the slave axes in an interrupt routine on the main CPU . The interrupt routine is not allowed to be stopped. These requirements are fulfilled by the following CPUs:

• CP260

• IF260 when it is used as a main CPU


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


17. Accessories

17.1 Overview


0AC240.9 2005 battery module

0G2001.00-090 Cable PC <-> NC154, RS232, NC154 operating system download

3BM150.9 2005 dummy module






Table 120: Accessory overview



17.2 AC240

17.2.1 Order Data



The battery module is used for central data buffering on the 2005 PLC (e.g. data and real-time clock for the XP152). It has two battery compartments for 9V block cells.

Connection to the power supply module is made with a 40 cm long cable. The cable is connected to a 5 pin terminal block. A second 5 pin terminal block is included in the delivery. The two together replace the 10 pin terminal block on the power supply.

A single width backplane is delivered with the battery module. The backplane is to be installed to the left of the main backplane. The battery module is inserted on this backplane and is therefore installed to the left of the power supply.

If a slot is free on the main backplane next to the power supply, the AC240 module can also be inserted there.


0AC240.9 2005 battery module

Table 121: AC240 order data

Product ID AC240

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Slot On backplane included in the delivery

Battery 9 V block cell

Number of Battery Compartments 2

Connection CableLengthConnection

40 cm5 pin terminal block, prewired

Buffer Time with 2 Alkali-Mangan "Extra Longlife" Batteries

See technical data for the processor module used



Table 122: AC240 technical data


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


17.3 Cable NC154 - PC

17.3.1 Order Data


For NC154 modules with a Rev. <54.23, the software module BOOT has to be installed in the module before the operating system update.

This cable is used to connect a PC to the NC154 module. The software module BOOT (NC154.S1) can be downloaded using this connection.


0G2001.00-090 2005 Positioning Accessory, cable for operating system download directly from the PC to the NC152

Table 123: Cable NC154 - PC order data



17.4 BM150

17.4.1 Order Data


Dummy modules are used to fill slots which are not needed. We recommend that you fill all unused slots with dummy modules.



Table 124: BM150 order data


Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


17.5 TB162

17.5.1 Order Data



The NC154 module is equipped with three 12 pin pin-connectors. The TB162 terminal block is used to make connections. The terminal blocks can be removed using an ejection lever on the module.




Product ID TB162

Number of Pins 12

Type of Terminal Screw clamps


Resistance between Contacts 6 mΩ


Current Load Max. 12 A / contact



Removal Mechanical

Stress Relief Cable tie on the module




17.6 TB170

17.6.1 Order Data



B&R SYSTEM 2005 modules are connected using a single row terminal block. The terminal block can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module.



TB170.9

TB170.91





Product ID TB170

Number of Pins 20

Type of Terminal Screw or cage clamps


Resistance between Contacts 6 mΩ


Current Load 1)


Max. 12 A / contact



Removal Mechanical

Stress Relief Cable tie on the module



Cha

pter

3B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

005


18. Manuals

18.1 Overview


MASYS22005-0 B&R 2005 User’s Manual, German

MASYS22005-E B&R 2005 User’s Manual, English





Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



1. Module Overview

The "Power" column contains a power value provided by the module or required by the module. In this way, a power balance can be calculated quickly and easily for a certain hardware configuration.

The power supplied by the PS modules is shown with a "+" sign. The power required by a module is shown with a "-" sign.

Add the positive and negative power values to calculate the power balance. The sum is not allowed to be less than zero.


Product ID Description Module Type Power Model No. Page



AI300 16 voltage inputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit I/O -9 W 2AI300.6 320

AI700 16 current inputs ±20 mA, resolution 13 bit I/O -9 W 2AI700.6 320

AI730 8 single channel isolated current inputs 0 - 25 mA, resolution 16 bit I/O -6 W 1) 2AI730.6 321

AO300 16 voltage outputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit I/O -10 W 2AO300.6 323

AO725 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit I/O -10 W 2AO725.6 323

AO900 8 voltage outputs ±10 V, 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit I/O -12 W 2AO900.6 323

AT300 8 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) I/O -9 W 2AT300.6 325


I/O -8 W 2AT610.6 326

BM100 Dummy module System, I/O 2BM100.9 340

BP101 2 slots for system bus 2BP101.3 278

BP110 4 slots for system bus, incl. bus termination 2BP110.3 278

BP200 1 slot for I/O bus 2BP200.4 278

BP201 4 slots for I/O bus 2BP201.4 278

BP202 1 slot for expansion or remote slave, I/O bus 2BP202.4 278

BP210 1 slot for I/O bus, incl. bus termination 2BP210.4 278

BP300 2 slots for CPU, system and I/O bus, incl. bus termination 2BP300.4 278

CP100 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM -10 W 2CP100.60-1 291

CP104 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface -10 W 2CP104.60-1 291

CP200 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 2 MByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface -20 W 2CP200.60-1 291

CP210 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 6 MByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface, MMU, FPU

-22.5 W 2CP210.60-1 291

DI400 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay, 8 interrupt capable inputs I/O -6 W 2DI400.6 306

DI425 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay I/O -6 W 2DI425.6 308


DI725 32 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay I/O -4 W 2DI725.6 309

DI825 8 namur inputs, Ex(i), 12 V, 12 mA, 100 µs switching delay I/O -11 W 2DI825.6 310

DO428 32 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A I/O -5 W 2DO428.6 313

DO430 32 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A I/O -2.9 W 2DO430.6 313

DO600 32 relay outputs, 120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A I/O -8 W 2DO600.6 315


DO710 8 change-over contacts, 8 normally open contacts, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A I/O -7 W 2DO710.6 317

DS100 Intelligent I/O processor, drum sequencer I/O -9 W 2) -k x PEncoder

2DS100.60-1 294

Table 1: B&R SYSTEM 2010 sorted alphabetically according to product ID




DS101 Intelligent I/O processor, drum sequencer with 32 transistor outputs I/O -13 W 3) -k x PEncoder

2DS101.60-1 297

EX100 Remote I/O Master System -12 W 2EX100.50-1 286

EX200 Remote I/O Slave I/O -12 W 2EX200.50-1 286

EX301 Expansion Slave I/O -3 W 2EX301.5 288

EX302 Expansion Master I/O -3 W 2EX302.5 288

IF100 Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS232/TTY, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN System -7 W 2IF100.60-1 332

IF101 Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS232/TTY, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN, 1 x ETHERNET

System -7 W 2IF101.60-1 332

ME910 Application memory (PLC software), 64 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM

2ME910.90-1 303

ME913 Application memory (PLC Software), 512 KByte SRAM, 1 MByte FlashPROM

2ME913.90-1 303

ME915 Application memory (PLC Software), 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM 2ME915.90-1 303

MP100 Multiprocessor, 64 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM System -12 W 2MP100.5 300

NC303 Intelligent I/O processor, path processor for ultrasonic transducer I/O -21 W –1.5 x PEncoder

2NC303.60-1 336

NW100 PROFIBUS network module System -15 W 2NW100.50-1 334

PS425 Power supply, 24 VDC, 100 W I/O +100 W 2PS425.9 282

PS740 Power supply, 100 - 240 VAC, 100 W I/O +100 W 2PS740.9 283

TB120 Terminal block, 20 pin screw clamps 2TB120.9 341


UM900 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 4 analog inputs, ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit, 2 analog outputs, ±10 V(resolution 12 bit) / 0 - 20 mA (resolution 11 bit)

I/O -8 W 2UM900.6 329

1) One watt is to be subtracted for each internally supplied encoder.2) The power consumption depends on the encoder supply used.

24 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 9 W + 1.5 x Encoder Power4.6 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 9 W + 2.5 x Encoder Power

3) The power consumption depends on the encoder supply used.24 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 13 W + 1.5 x Encoder Power4.6 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 13 W + 2.5 x Encoder Power


Module Rack

BP101 2 slots for system bus 2BP101.3 278

BP110 4 slots for system bus, incl. bus termination 2BP110.3 278

BP200 1 slot for I/O bus 2BP200.4 278

BP201 4 slots for I/O bus 2BP201.4 278

BP202 1 slot for expansion or remote slave, I/O bus 2BP202.4 278

BP210 1 slot for I/O bus, incl. bus termination 2BP210.4 278

BP300 2 slots for CPU, system and I/O bus, incl. bus termination 2BP300.4 278


PS425 Power supply, 24 VDC, 100 W I/O +100 W 2PS425.9 282

PS740 Power supply, 100 - 240 VAC, 100 W I/O +100 W 2PS740.9 283


EX100 Remote I/O Master System -12 W 2EX100.50-1 286

EX200 Remote I/O Slave I/O -12 W 2EX200.50-1 286

EX301 Expansion Slave I/O -3 W 2EX301.5 288

EX302 Expansion Master I/O -3 W 2EX302.5 288

CPUs

CP100 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM -10 W 2CP100.60-1 291

CP104 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface -10 W 2CP104.60-1 291





Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


CP200 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 2 MByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface -20 W 2CP200.60-1 291

CP210 CPU, 128 KByte DPR, 6 MByte System RAM, CAN Bus Interface, MMU, FPU

-22.5 W 2CP210.60-1 291

Programmable Modules

DS100 Intelligent I/O processor, drum sequencer I/O -9 W 1) -k x PEncoder

2DS100.60-1 294

DS101 Intelligent I/O processor, drum sequencer with 32 transistor outputs I/O -13 W 2) -k x PEncoder

2DS101.60-1 297

MP100 Multiprocessor, 64 KByte DPR, 256 KByte System RAM System -12 W 2MP100.5 300

Program Memory Modules

ME910 Application memory (PLC software), 64 KByte SRAM, 256 KByte FlashPROM

2ME910.90-1 303

ME913 Application memory (PLC Software), 512 KByte SRAM, 1 MByte FlashPROM

2ME913.90-1 303

ME915 Application memory (PLC Software), 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM 2ME915.90-1 303


DI400 32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay, 8 interrupt capable inputs I/O -6 W 2DI400.6 306



DI725 32 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay I/O -4 W 2DI725.6 309

DI825 8 namur inputs, Ex(i), 12 V, 12 mA, 100 µs switching delay I/O -11 W 2DI825.6 310


DO428 32 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A I/O -5 W 2DO428.6 313

DO430 32 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A I/O -2.9 W 2DO430.6 313



DO710 8 change-over contacts, 8 normally open contacts, 240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A I/O -7 W 2DO710.6 317


AI300 16 voltage inputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit I/O -9 W 2AI300.6 320

AI700 16 current inputs ±20 mA, resolution 13 bit I/O -9 W 2AI700.6 320

AI730 8 single channel isolated current inputs 0 - 25 mA, resolution 16 bit I/O -6 W 3) 2AI730.6 321


AO300 16 voltage outputs ±10 V, resolution 12 bit I/O -10 W 2AO300.6 323

AO725 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit I/O -10 W 2AO725.6 323

AO900 8 voltage outputs ±10 V, 8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit I/O -12 W 2AO900.6 323

Temperature Modules

AT300 8 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line) I/O -9 W 2AT300.6 325


I/O -8 W 2AT610.6 326

Other Modules

UM900 8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, 8 digital outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 4 analog inputs, ±10 V / 0 - 20 mA, resolution 12 bit, 2 analog outputs, ±10 V(resolution 12 bit) / 0 - 20 mA (resolution 11 bit)

I/O -8 W 2UM900.6 329


IF100 Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS232/TTY, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN System -7 W 2IF100.60-1 332

IF101 Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS232/TTY, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN, 1 x ETHERNET

System -7 W 2IF101.60-1 332

NW100 PROFIBUS network module System -15 W 2NW100.50-1 334


NC303 Intelligent I/O processor, path processor for ultrasonic transducer I/O -21 W –1.5 x PEncoder

2NC303.60-1 336

Accessories

BM100 Dummy module System, I/O 2BM100.9 340







Manuals



1) The power consumption depends on the encoder supply used. 24 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 9 W + 1.5 x Encoder Power4.6 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 9 W + 2.5 x Encoder Power

2) The power consumption depends on the encoder supply used.24 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 13 W + 1.5 x Encoder Power4.6 V Encoder Supply Voltage: 13 W + 2.5 x Encoder Power

3) One watt is to be subtracted for each internally supplied encoder.




Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



2.1 Dimensions

The B&R SYSTEM 2010 consists of both single and double width modules. The width corresponds to the number of slots required:

The measurements given are installation measurements. The depth of the backplane must be taken into consideration to find the total depth of the PLC.

2.2 Basic Module Construction

Each module front is divided into two areas:

• Status display

• Connection area

The status display is found behind a transparent plastic door which can be opened by swinging it upwards. Display and/or operational elements such as a seven segment display, status LEDs, a number switch, a reset key, etc. are found here depending on the module. The plastic door is to be closed when operating the PLC.

The connection area is situated behind the module door. D-type connectors and pin-connectors for terminal blocks can be found here. The slot for the application memory is found behind module door on processor modules (double width).

Width Slots

Single width 1

Double width 2

Table 3: General Dimensions

Diagram 1: 2010 module dimensions



A legend strip can be inserted on the inner side of the module doors of I/O modules and the CPU. This legend strip can be used to label the terminal block connections and the interface assignments.

2.3 Differences between System and I/O Modules

System and I/O modules belonging to the 2010 system can be differentiated between optically. The bottom edge of the module door is angled on I/O modules and straight on system modules.

This allows a visual check of your system’s integrity. Only I/O modules (slanted door) are allowed to the right of the CPU and only system modules (straight door) are allowed to the left of the CPU.

Diagram 2: B&R SYSTEM 2010 module construction

Diagram 3: B&R SYSTEM 2010 system and I/O modules


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


2.4 Module Rack

The backplane where the system or I/O bus is located is modular. Backplanes are available in different widths and are divided into three different groups:

Backplane dimensions:

Diagram 4: Different types of B&R SYSTEM 2010 module racks

Diagram 5: Backplane dimensions



2.5 Mounting Rail

A mounting rail which conforms to the standard DIN EN 50022 is required to install the PLC. The mounting rail must be grounded and must make electrical contact with the switching cabinet’s back wall.


2.6 Installation


The installation of the PLC takes place in the following order:

1) Installing the mounting rail

2) Installing the backplane

3) Installing the PLC modules

2.6.1 Installing the Module Rack

The following steps are to be taken to connect the individual backplane modules together on the mounting rail:

a) Set all fastening levers to the "OPEN" position

b) Hang the left-most backplane module in the desired position on the mounting rail

c) Hang all other backplane modules on the mounting rail individually and push them to the left up against the neighboring backplane module until the connecting clip locks into place. The guide pegs must align with the respective holes in the module to the left.

d) After all backplane modules have been installed and connected together, all fastening levers should be set to the "CLOSE" position.

Both system and I/O buses must be terminated using a backplane module with a bus terminator

(Exception: System bus with 2 slots).

The backplane modules should be arranged so that the single width modules are situated at the end of the bus and the quadruple width modules are connected directly to the backplane module for the CPU. This makes it easier to integrate future backplane expansions.

Diagram 6: Mounting rail


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


Removing backplane modules is done in the reverse order.


Diagram 8: Installing the backplane module on the mounting rail

Diagram 9: Push the module rack to the left



2.6.2 Install the PLC modules

After all of the backplane modules are fastened securely to the mounting rail in their proper positions, the PLC modules can be installed in their respective slots on the backplanes. A module is to be installed in the following order:

(1) Hang the module in the corresponding module slot using the module support hook.

(2) Tip the module back until the upper fastening clip clicks onto the PLC module.

Diagram 10: Install module

Diagram 11: Tip the module back


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


The PLC modules are removed in the opposite order.

Pressing the module fastening lever (1) will unclip the locking mechanism. The module can then be tilted forward (2) and removed from the backplane (3).

2.7 Terminal Block TB120 / TB140

Wiring the module is done with a double row terminal block that can be easily be inserted or removed. Using the special coding pins on the terminal block and on the socket in the module, a clear relationship (terminal block !↔ module or slot) can be established. The connection of the double row terminal block is monitored and indicated by a status LED.

Diagram 12: Removing a module

Diagram 13: Terminal block TB120

Diagram 14: Terminal block TB140



A lever has been integrated which allows the terminal block to be locked into place and removed. This eases use, even for 40 pin terminal blocks.


All cables (cable bundles) are to be run down from the terminal blocks. A cable tie is used to relieve stress on the terminal block and is attached to the slots provided.

2.7.2 Coding the Terminal Block

Coding makes it possible to ensure that a terminal block cannot be connected to the wrong module. For example, coding the terminal block can prevent a terminal block which is meant for a digital output module from being connected to an input module. Coding is done using 6 coding pins on the terminal block and the socket in the module.

This makes it almost impossible to accidentally switch neighboring terminal blocks.


The following values are valid for all B&R SYSTEM 2010 modules if no other values are listed in the "Technical Data" section.

Diagram 15: Integrated terminal block lever




Table 4: Environmental temperature and relative humidity


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


3. Module Rack


The B&R 2010 system backplane has a modular construction. The individual backplane modules are installed on the mounting rail. The respective bus system (either I/O bus or system bus) and the supply lines are on these backplane modules. The modular construction allows you to create a backplane to suit the job and the environment.

We recommend that you construct your backplane with as few empty slots as possible. Dummy modules must be installed in all free slots.

Both system and I/O buses must be terminated using a backplane module with a bus terminator (exception: system bus with 2 slots).

The module addresses of I/O modules are determined by the slots that they are in (slot coding). Addressing begins with slot 1 on the I/O bus, which has address 1. Modules addresses can be read directly from a two digit seven segment status display which is located on the front of the I/O modules. The module addresses of system modules are not slot dependant. System module addresses are set using a number switch on the module.

Diagram 17: Module addresses of system modules and I/O modules



3.2 Configuration of the Various Module Racks

The following backplane configurations are available:

• Main backplane with system bus: BP110, BP300, BP210

• Main backplane without system bus: BP101, BP200, BP201

• Expansion backplane (remote I/O or I/O bus expansion): BP202

Different backplane modules are to be used, depending on the backplane configuration. The following backplane modules are available (see diagram):

Diagram 18: Different types of B&R SYSTEM 2010 module racks


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


The following modules are to be used for the different backplane configurations:

All modules shown in gray must be used with the respective configuration. One or more of the backplane modules shown as dotted lines can be used to expand the backplane.

The backplane modules for the I/O bus should be arranged so that the single width modules are situated at the end of the bus and the quadruple width modules are connected directly to the backplane module for the CPU. This makes it easier to integrate future backplane expansions.

When configuring the backplanes, remember that the number of slots is limited and these limits are not allowed to be exceeded:

Diagram 19: Backplane configuration

Bus Number of Slots

System Bus 8

I/O Bus 20

Table 5: Maximum number of slots



3.3 BP101 / BP110 / BP200 / BP201 / BP202 / BP210 / BP300

3.3.1 Order Data



2BP101.3 2010 backplane module, 2 slots for system modules

2BP110.3 2010 backplane module, 4 slots for system modules with bus termination for the system bus

2BP200.4 2010 backplane module, 1 slot for an I/O module

2BP201.4 2010 backplane module, 4 slots for I/O modules

2BP202.4 2010 backplane module, 1 slot for expansions/remote slave

2BP210.4 2010 backplane module, 1 slot for an I/O module with bus termination for the I/O bus

2BP300.4 2010 backplane module, 2 slots for a CPU with bus termination for the system bus

Table 6: BP101 / BP110 / BP200 / BP201 / BP202 / BP210 / BP300 order data

Backplane Modules for the System Bus

Product ID BP101 BP110

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Number of Slots for System Modules

2 4

Bus Termination No Yes (system bus)


2858020

28516020

Backplane Modules for the I/O Bus

Product ID BP200 BP201 BP202 BP210

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Number of Slots forI/O Module Expansion orRemote Slave

1 ----

4 ----

---- 1

1----

Bus Termination No No No Yes (I/O bus)


2854020

28516020

285 4020

2854020

Backplane Module for the CPU

Product ID BP300

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Number of Slots 2 (for 1 CPU)

Bus Termination Yes (system bus)


2858020

Table 7: BP101 / BP110 / BP200 / BP201 / BP202 / BP210 / BP300 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


4. Power Supply Modules


Power supply modules create the voltage required internally by the PLC from the input voltage (24 VDC, 120 VAC or 230 VAC). Every main and expansion unit requires at least one power supply module. Power supply modules can only be installed on the I/O bus (never on the system bus).

The distinguishing feature relevant to power supply modules is the input voltage range.

When configuring a system, make sure that the power consumption of all modules to be used is not greater than the output power of the power supply modules.

Power can be supplied to the B&R SYSTEM 2010 using any number of power supply modules (including possible redundant modules) which can be placed in almost any slot in the entire system. The supply modules can be inserted or removed while under power.

4.2 Safety Features

Power supply modules have internal current limitation (short circuit protection) and thermal overload protection. A fuse protects the module against overloads and reverse polarity. The fuse is behind the module door.

The functions of the power supply module can be monitored with a READY relay. The READY relay is closed when the power supply module is functioning properly. If an error occurs (e.g. overload), the relay opens. The READY relay can be used to externally monitor the supply.

4.3 Overview

4.4 Power Supply Module Location

(1) B&R recommends operating a power supply module in the far right slot of the I/O bus.

(2) The slots for the other power supplies can be determined using a simple rule:

Add the power consumption of the modules and the power provided by power supplies which are already installed (including the sign) from right to left. The sum is not allowed to be less than zero, otherwise another power supply module must be installed (see the following example). The first slot is an exception because a power supply cannot be inserted on the system bus.

(3) Due to power dissipation of the power supply, which in turn causes heat, power supplies should not be situated directly next to modules with high power consumption.


Input Voltage 24 VDC 90 ... 270 VAC


Fuse (slow-blow) 10 A / 250 V 1.6 A / 250 V

Table 8: Power supply module overview



Example to clarify any problems concerning the location of the power supply modules:

• The following modules are required in a system:

• The sum of this calculation determines that at least two power supply modules are needed.

• Take note that the output power of the power supply modules depends on the environmental temperature and the input voltage (see "Technical Data").

• The following table can be used to determine the slots for the power supply modules:

Amount Module Description Bus Power Consumption [W]

Per module !∑

1 NW100 Network module System bus 15 15

1 CP100 CPU System or I/O bus 10 10

1 AI300 Analog input module I/O bus 9 9

4 AT610 Thermocouple module I/O bus 8 32

3 AO300 Analog output module I/O bus 10 30

2 DI426 Digital input module I/O bus 6 12

2 DO700 Digital output module I/O bus 6 12

!∑ = 120

Table 9: Power Supply Module Location

Module Power [W] 1)

1) The power consumption of a module is indicated with "-" and the power supplied by a power supply module is indicated with "+".

∑ [W] Remarks

PS +100 +100 B&R recommendation: Install a power supply module in the far right slot of the I/O bus.

DO700 -6 +94

DO700 -6 +88

DI426 -6 +82

DI426 -6 +76

AO300 -10 +66

AO300 -10 +56

AO300 -10 +46

AT610 -8 +38

AT610 -8 +30

AT610 -8 +22

AT610 -8 +14

AI300 -9 +5

PS +100 +105 A second power supply module must be installed here because there is not enough power for another module (5 W).

CP100 -10 +95

NW100 -15 +80 80 W is available in addition to the power required by the modules being used (reserve).

Table 10: Power supply module slots


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


According to the calculation, the system would look like this (see diagram).

If the modules are set up differently, the calculation must be made again.

After the number of power supply modules required for the system has been determined, the required backplane modules can be selected (see "Backplane Modules").

All empty slots must be filled with dummy modules.

Diagram 20: System arrangement



4.5 PS425

4.5.1 Order Data



2PS425.9 2010 power supply module, 24 VDC, 100 W

Table 11: PS425 order data

Product ID PS425

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2010 power supply module, single width

Backplane BP200, BP201, BP210

Power Supply


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

External Backup Capacitorfor Single Phase Bridgefor Three Phase Bridge

20000 µF12000 µF

Output Power 100 W


ProtectionFuseThermal overload protectionCurrent limitation

10 A (slow-blow) / 250 VMonitoring the housing temperature

Monitoring the power supplied

Peripherals

Status Display LEDs

READY RelayDesignNominal Switching VoltageMax. Load on Contacts Transient Voltage

Protection

Normally open24 VDC / 230 VAC

2 A2.5 kV

External

Table 12: PS425 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


4.6 PS740

4.6.1 Order Data



2PS740.9 2010 power supply module, 100-240 VAC, 100 W

Table 13: PS740 order data

Product ID PS740

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2010 power supply module, single width


Power Supply


90 VAC100 to 240 VAC

270 VAC



750 V1.3 ms non-periodic

Output Power see Diagram "Output Power"


ProtectionFuseThermal overload protectionCurrent limitation

1.6 A (slow-blow) / 250 VMonitoring the housing temperature

Monitoring the power supplied

Peripherals

Status Display LEDs

READY RelayDesignNominal Switching VoltageMax. Load on Contacts Transient VoltageProtection

Normally open24 VDC / 230 VAC

2 A2.5 kV

External

Table 14: PS740 technical data



4.6.3 Output Power

The output power of the PS740 power supply module sinks if the input voltage decreases or the operating temperature increases (because of internal temperature monitoring). This must be taken into consideration when planning your power requirements.

4.6.4 Supplying External Components

The secondary voltage (28 V) produced can be switched to the I/O bus (PLC system) or to a terminal block on a module using a toggle switch. This makes it possible to use this power supply to provide power for external I/O components.

Diagram 21: Output power in relationship to temperature


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



5.1 Overview

Module Description

EX100 2010 remote I/O master, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connection to a remote I/O bus

EX200 2010 remote I/O slave, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connection to a remote I/O bus

EX301 2010 expansion slave, I/O bus divided into bus segments, Order expansion cable separately!

EX302 2010 expansion master, I/O bus divided into bus segments, Order expansion cable separately!

Table 15: Bus Controller module overview



5.2 EX100 / EX200

5.2.1 Order Data



Remote I/O Bus Controller

2EX100.50-1 2010 remote I/O master, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connection to a remote I/O bus

2EX200.50-1 2010 remote I/O slave, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connection to a remote I/O bus

Accessories




Table 16: EX100 / EX200 order data

Product ID EX100 - Remote Master EX200 - Remote Slave

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2010 system module B&R 2010 I/O module

Backplane BP101, BP110 BP202


Peripherals

Diagnosis LEDs Yes

Number Switch Used to set the module address ----

NODE# Used to set the slave address


Interface Type 2 x RS485

Design 2 x 9 pin D-type socket




Remote I/O Bus


Number of Remote I/O Masters on the System Bus Max. 8 ---

Number of Slaves Max. 31 (without repeater) ---




Table 17: EX100 / EX200 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010





Product ID EX100 - Remote Master EX200 - Remote Slave

Table 17: EX100 / EX200 technical data (cont.)



5.3 EX301 / EX302

5.3.1 Order Data



2EX301.5 2010 Expansion Slave, I/O bus divided into bus segments, Order expansion cable separately!

2EX302.5 2010 Expansion Master, I/O bus divided into bus segments, Order expansion cable separately!

0G0010.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for

B&R 2005 / B&R 2010


Table 18: EX301 / EX302 order data

Product ID EX301 – Expansion Slave EX302 – Expansion Master

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


Backplane BP202 BP200, BP201, BP210


Peripherals

Interfaces 1 for connection to an expansion master 2 for connection of two expansion slaves

Transfer MediaLength

Expansion Cable1 m or 2 m



Table 19: EX301 / EX302 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


6. CPUs


The CPU is operated on the BP300 backplane module. It requires two slots. A CPU cannot be operated in an expansion unit.

6.2 Status Area

The status area contains status LEDs, a two digit status display, various keys and the lithium battery compartment.

6.3 Connection area

The serial interfaces (online interface), a terminal block for FORCE and READY contacts, a key switch and the slot for the application memory are all found behind the module doors.

Behind the left module door Behind the right module door

Diagram 22: B&R SYSTEM 2010 CPU status area

Diagram 23: B&R SYSTEM 2010 CPU connection area



6.4 Safety Features

A Ready Relay can be used to monitor the functionality of the PLC. The ready relay is closed during normal operation and opens if an error which causes the PLC to fail occurs. The ready relay is normally connected to the E-STOP circuit.

The FORCE contact is coupled with the "FORCED" LED on the display and is closed if at least one process variable is "forced" to a certain value.

6.5 Programming


6.6 Overview








Table 20: CPU programming

Module Description

CP100 2010 CPU, 128 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 electrically isolated RS485/422, RS 485/422: network capable, Order application memory separately!

CP104 2010 CPU, 128 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately!

CP200 2010 CPU, 128 KB + 2 MB SRAM, 2x4 KB Cache, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232, 1 electrically isolated RS485/422, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, RS 485/422 + CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately!

CP210 2010 CPU, 128 KB + 6 MB SRAM, 2x4 KB Cache, MMU + FPU, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232, 1 electrically isolated RS485/422, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, RS 485/422 + CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately!



Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


6.7 CP100 / CP104 / CP200 / CP210

6.7.1 Order Data



CPU

2CP100.60-1 2010 CPU, 128 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, RS485/RS422: network capable, Order application memory separately!

2CP104.60-1 2010 CPU, 128 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately!

2CP200.60-1 2010 CPU, 128 KB + 2 MB SRAM, 2 x 4 KB Cache, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, RS485/RS422 + CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately!

2CP210.60-1 2010 CPU, 128 KB+6 MB SRAM, 2x4 KB Cache, MMU+FPU, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, 1 electrically isolated CAN interface, RS485/RS422 + CAN: network capable, Order application memory separately!


Table 22: CP100 / CP104 / CP200 / CP210 order data


Application Memory

2ME910.90-1 2010 application memory, 64 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system

2ME913.90-1 2010 application memory, 512 KB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system

2ME915.90-1 2010 application memory, 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system

Accessories







0AC916.9 Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC


Table 23: Application memory and accessories

Product ID CP100 CP104 CP200 CP210

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Module Type B&R 2010 CPU, double width

Backplane BP300

Power Consumption (incl. APM) Max. 10 W Max. 20 W Max. 22.5 W

Table 24: CP100 / CP104 / CO200 / CP210 technical data



Processor Section

Communication RISC

MMU and FPU No No Yes

Instruction Cycle Time 0.8 µs 0.125 µs

Cache No 2 * 4 KByte

Dual Ported RAM (DPR) 128 KByte SRAM

System RAM 256 KB SRAM 2 MB SRAM 6 MB SRAM

Application Memory (not incl.) ME910, ME913, ME915

Data BufferingLithium Battery in CPUGold Foil Capacitor in CPUBattery Monitoring

Min. 2 years 1)

Min. 10 minYes

Peripherals

System bus Yes


Nonvolatile, battery buffered10 ms

Key Switch Yes

Reset Button Yes

Three user keys UP, DOWN, ENTER can be programmed by user

Status Display Alphanumeric LCD display (2 lines with 8 characters each), 6 status LEDs

READY RelayDesignSwitching Voltage

NominalMaximum

Max. Load on the ContactsTransient VoltageProtection

Normally open

24 VDC / 230 VAC30 VDC / 270 VAC

3 A2 kV

Required externally

FORCE RelayDesignSwitching Voltage

NominalMaximum

Max. Load on the ContactsTransient VoltageProtection

Normally open

24 VDC / 230 VAC30 VDC / 270 VAC

3 A2 kV

Required externally

StandardCommunication Interfaces


RS232No


Max. 64 kBaud


RS232/TTY 2)

Yes9 pin D-type plug

RS232: Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud, TTY: Max. 300 mMax. 64 kBaud

RS232Yes


Max. 64 kBaud


Bus Length 10 -60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m

RS485/RS422 2)

Yes9 pin D-type socket

Max. 1,200 mMax. 347 kBaud

CANYes


500 kBits/s250 kBits/s50 kBits/s

RS485/RS422 2)


Max. 1,200 mMax. 347 kBaud


Bus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 - 200 m Bus Length 800 - 1,000 m

CANYes


500 kBits/s250 kBits/s50 kBits/s

1) A full battery also has to be in the APM. Otherwise, the buffer time is reduced to 1 year because the RAM in the APM is also being buffered!2) The interface can be set using software.

Product ID CP100 CP104 CP200 CP210

Table 24: CP100 / CP104 / CO200 / CP210 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


7. Programmable Modules

7.1 Overview

Module Description

DS100 2010 electronic drum sequencer, absolute encoder, SSI/parallel, 16 bit, 3 differential inputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 3 differential outputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 16 digital inputs 24 VDC, 5 µs, sink, Order terminal blocks separately!

DS101 2010 electronic drum sequencer, absolute encoder, SSI/parallel, 16 bit, 3 differential inputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 3 differential outputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 16 digital inputs 24 VDC, 5 µs, sink, 32 digital outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, Order terminal blocks separately!

MP100 2010 multiprocessor, 64 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, RS485/RS422: network capable, Order application memory separately!

Table 25: Programmable module overview



7.2 DS100

7.2.1 Order Data



2DS100.60-1 2010 electronic drum sequencer, absolute encoder, SSI/parallel, 16 bit, 3 differential inputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 3 differential outputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 16 digital inputs 24 VDC, 5 µs, sink, Order terminal blocks separately!



Table 26: DS100 order data

Product ID DS100

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



Power Consumption24 V encoder supply4.6 V encoder supply

9 W + 1.5 x encoder power9 W + 2.5 x encoder power

Processor Section

Communication RISC


Dual Ported RAM (DPR) 384 Byte SRAM (not buffered)

System RAM 256 KByte SRAM (not buffered)

Encoder Supply (internal)

SSI Absolute EncoderVoltageLoad

24 V ±10%Max. 120 mA

Absolute Encoder with Parallel IFVoltageLoad

4.6 V ±10%Max. 120 mA

Protection Short circuit protection and current limitation


Encoder to be Used

Type Absolute encoder (single turn)

Synchronous Serial InterfaceCodingResolutionOperating Range

Gray or dualMax. 16 Bit4096 steps

Parallel InterfaceCodingResolution

Gray or dualMax. 12 bit

Table 27: DS100 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



The DS100 module is a programmable I/O module with 3 differential outputs, 3 differential inputs and 16 digital inputs. The main application area for this module is electronic drum sequencers. The drum sequencer has its name from its mechanical predecessor, which functioned using a series of cams situated on a rotating drum. Each cam corresponds to a certain output, which is activated at certain positions as the drum rotates. An electronic version of the drum sequencer has the following advantages over the mechanical drum sequencer:

• Better switching precision over the entire speed range (machine acceleration and deceleration, production speed changes)

• No mechanical wear caused by switching cycles

• Easier cam modification (changing products)

• Definition of compensation times (dead time compensation)

When used as a drum sequencer, the DS100 intelligent I/O processor can calculate the output states of up to 128 outputs according to the current angular position. In addition, a compensation time can be used for the calculation to offset the mechanical commutation times. The output states are stored in the DPR (Dual Port RAM) and can be read cyclically by the PLC CPU and then copied to any digital output modules. To read the current angular position, the following encoders can be connected to the differential inputs and outputs or the digital inputs on the DS100 module:

• Incremental encoder

• Absolute encoder with synchronous serial interface (SSI)

• Absolute encoder with parallel interface

Differential Outputs

Number of Differential Outputs 3

Output Level RS422 standard

Output Frequency Max. 100 kHz


Yes (optocoupler)No

Differential Inputs

Number of Differential Inputs 3

Input Level RS422 standard

Input Frequency Max. 100 kHz


Yes (optocoupler)No

Digital Inputs


164

Wiring Sink


24 VDC30 VDC

Input Resistance 4.4 kW


<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V


(max. and typ.)5 µs (pulse width ≥20 µs)5 µs (pulse width ≥20 µs)

Count Frequency Max. 25 kHz (1:1 ratio)



No



Product ID DS100

Table 27: DS100 technical data (cont.)



The coding method (gray or dual) and the encoder resolution can be defined by the user with software (function blocks). The encoder supply is provided by the module. It is electrically isolated from the PLC, short circuit protected and current limited and is output on the terminal block. The electronic drum sequencer can be configured by the user using function blocks. The respective software (including software documentation) can be obtained from B&R.


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


7.3 DS101

7.3.1 Order Data



2DS101.60-1 2010 electronic drum sequencer, absolute encoder, SSI/parallel, 16 bit, 3 differential inputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 3 differential outputs, RS422 level, 100 kHz, 16 digital inputs 24 VDC, 5 µs, sink, 32 digital outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A, Order terminal blocks separately!



Table 28: DS101 order data

Product ID DS101

General Information




Power Consumption24 V encoder supply4.6 V encoder supply

13 W +1.5 x encoder power13 W + 2.5 x encoder power

Processor Section

Communication RISC




Encoder Supply (internal)

SSI Absolute EncoderVoltageLoad

24 V ±10%Max. 120 mA

Absolute Encoder with Parallel IFVoltageLoad

4.6 V ±10%Max. 120 mA

Protection Short circuit protection and current limitation


Encoder to be Used

Type Absolute encoder (single turn)

Synchronous Serial InterfaceCodingResolutionOperating Range

Gray or dualMax. 16 bit4096 steps

Parallel InterfaceCodingResolution

Gray or dualMax. 12 bit

Table 29: DS101 technical data



Differential Outputs

Number of Differential Outputs 3

Output Level RS422 standard

Output Frequency Max. 100 kHz

Product ID DS101


Yes (optocoupler)No

Differential Inputs

Number of Differential Inputs 3

Input Level RS422 standard

Input Frequency Max. 100 kHz


Yes (optocoupler)No

Digital Inputs

Number of Inputs Total in 4 Groups of

164

Wiring Sink


24 VDC30 VDC



<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V


(max. and typ.)5 µs (pulse width ≥20 µs)5 µs (pulse width ≥20 µs)

Count Frequency Max. 25 kHz (1:1 ratio)



No

Digital Outputs

Number of Digital OutputsTotalin 4 Groups of

328

Design Transistor

Wiring Source


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC

Continuous Currentper Outputper GroupModule

Max. 0.5 AMax. 4 AMax. 16 A




Typ. 5 µs / max. 110 µsTyp. 60 µs / max. 100 µs



YesYesNo


Dimensions B&R 2010 double width

Product ID DS101

Table 29: DS101 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


General Information

The DS101 module is a programmable I/O module with 3 differential outputs, 3 differential inputs, 3 digital inputs and 32 digital outputs. Electronic drum sequencers are the main area of application for this module. The DS101 is basically the same as the DS100, but has 32 transistor outputs which the intelligent I/O processor handles without the support of the PLC CPU.



7.4 MP100

7.4.1 Order Data



Multiprocessor

2MP100.5 2010 multiprocessor, 64 + 256 KB SRAM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS485/RS422, RS485/RS422: network capable, Order application memory separately!

Application Memory

2ME910.90-1 2010 application memory, 64 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system

2ME913.90-1 2010 application memory, 512 KB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system

2ME915.90-1 2010 application memory, 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM, with PLC operating system

Accessories


0G1000.00-090 Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O



Table 30: MP100 order data

Product ID MP100

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes


Backplane BP101, BP110

Power Consumption (incl. APM) Max. 12 W

Processor Section

Communication RISC


Dual Ported RAM (DPR) 64 KByte SRAM

System RAM 256 KByte SRAM

Application Memory (not incl.) ME910, ME913, ME915

Data BufferingLithium Battery (APM)Gold Foil Capacitor (APM)Battery Monitoring

Min. 1 year 1)

Min. 5 minYes

Peripherals

System Bus Yes

Reset Button Yes

Status Display 8 Status LEDs



RS232No


64 kBaud

Table 31: MP100 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



Multiprocessors are used to reduce the load on the CPU, and to increase the performance of the PLC system. The following list contains some of the tasks that can be carried out by multiprocessors:

• Preprocessing data

• Preparing data

• Monitoring functions during commissioning and service

• Communication via serial interfaces

The multiprocessor communicates with the CPU using a common memory area (Dual Ported RAM). Additionally, the multiprocessor has a system bus interface which can be used to actively access the system bus. Using this system interface, the multiprocessor can exchange data with the CPU and other system modules.

The CPU and the multiprocessor are software compatible. This means that all programs in the CPU (e.g. application tasks) can also run on the multiprocessor. The multiprocessor can be connected to the programming device via the RS232 interface.


RS485/RS422 2)


1,200 m347 kBaud

1) Buffering taken over by lithium battery in APM. RAM is buffered in the APM and MP, therefore the buffer duration is reduced to 1 year.2) The interface can be set using software.

Product ID MP100

Table 31: MP100 technical data (cont.)





The application memory module is inserted into the front of the CPU. User RAM, User PROM and Operating System ROM are found in the application memory module.

8.2 Buffering the RAM

The User RAM is buffered by a lithium battery. The memory contents remain for at least 2 years without power.

The buffer time is shorter if the application memory module is in a CPU because the System RAM in the CPU is also buffered by this battery when power is not applied if the lithium battery in the CPU is not available.

8.3 Overview

Module Description

ME910 2010 application memory, 64 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM with PLC operating system

ME913 2010 application memory, 512 KB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM with PLC operating system

ME915 2010 application memory, 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM with PLC operating system

Table 32: Application memory module overview


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


8.4 ME910 / ME913 / ME915

8.4.1 Order Data



Application Memory

2ME910.90-1 2010 application memory, 64 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM with PLC operating system

2ME913.90-1 2010 application memory, 512 KB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM with PLC operating system

2ME915.90-1 2010 application memory, 2 MB SRAM, 2 MB FlashPROM with PLC operating system

Accessories

0AC200.9 Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, cylindrical battery


Table 33: ME910 / ME913 / ME915 order data

Product ID ME910 ME913 ME915

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Operating System PLC Software

Memory

User SRAM 64 KByte 512 KByte 2 MByte

User FlashPROM 256 KByte 1024 KByte 2 MByte

Deleting/Programming FlashPROM Programming logic in the module, LED display

FlashPROM Write Protection Switch on the module

Buffering the RAMLithium Battery (APM)Gold Foil Capacitor (APM)

Min. 2 years 1)

Min. 10 min.

1) The buffer time given refers to application memory that is not installed in a processor module. Otherwise, the buffer time is reduced to 1 year because the RAM in the processormodule is also being buffered.

Storage

Storage TemperatureAPM without Lithium BatteryAPM with Lithium BatteryLithium Battery (not installed)

-20 to +70 °C-20 to +60 °C-20 to +60 °C

Storage TimeLithium Battery (not installed) Max. 3 years at 30 °C



103 mm32 mm

122 mm

Table 34: ME910 / ME913 / ME915 technical data





Digital input modules convert binary process signals into the internal signal level required by the PLC. The states of the digital inputs are shown with status LEDs.

The distinguishing features relevant for the input modules are:


• Input voltage



9.2 Input Filter


9.3 Overview

Diagram 24: Input filter

Module DI400 DI425 DI426 DI725 DI825

Number of Inputs 32 32 32 32 8

Input Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 / 230 VAC

Input CircuitSwitching RangeHysteresis

1.2 to 2.1 mATyp. 0.5 mA

Input Delay 10 ms 10 ms 1 ms 50 ms 100 µs

Remarks 8 CSI inputs4 counter inputs

Ignition protection[EEx ia] IIC

Table 35: Digital input module overview


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


9.4 Sink/Source Connections

All 24 VDC input modules from the B&R SYSTEM 2010 (except DI825) can be wired as sink or source circuits. The inputs on a module are normally separated in electrically isolated groups of four inputs, therefore individual group can also be wired differently.

In a sink circuit (current consumer for the sensor), the COM connection for an input group is connected to signal ground and the inputs are connected to sensors that switch to 24 V.

For source wiring (current supplier from the sensor's point of view), the COM connection of an input group is connected to +24 VDC, and the inputs are connected to GND switching sensors.

Diagram 25: Sink Connection

Diagram 26: Source Connection



9.5 DI400

9.5.1 Order Data



2DI400.6 2010 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink/source, 8 electrically isolated input groups, 8 change-of-state inputs, 4 counter inputs, 100 kHz, gate or period measurement, Order terminal block separately!




Product ID DI400

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Modules per System 1


324



24 VDC30 VDC


Input Resistance Approx. 4 kΩ


<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V


10 ms12 ms

CSI InputsAmountDelayInterrupt Triggered

85 µs

When state changes

Counter InputsAmountInput FrequencyResolutionUsed for

4Max. 100 kHz

16 Bit Event counting, gate / period measurement




Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



Inputs 1 to 16 have special functions:

9.5.4 Change-of-State Inputs

Inputs 1 to 8 can be selectively enabled for interrupt generation. If the state of an enabled input changes, an interrupt (IRQ) is created in the CPU and the appropriate IRQ task is started.

With active CSI inputs, the normal input function is not affected. Each input can still be read normally regardless of if an input is enabled as a CSI input.

9.5.5 Counter (16 bit)

Four independent 16 bit counters are available to the user using the input pairs 9/10, 11/12, 13/14 and 15/16. The counters can be reset by the application program at any time (using software) to provide a defined starting point (reference value). An overflow message is not registered.

Each counter can be configured individually for:

• Event counting

• Gate measurement

• Period measurement

For gate and period measurement, an input signal (gate input) is measured either with an external or an internal frequency. The external frequency is connected to the counter input (max. 100 kHz). When using an internal frequency, either 1 MHz or 4 MHz can be selected.

Each input can still continue to be read as a normal digital input (10 ms input delay), regardless of if it is used as counter input or a gate input.




No



Inputs Special Functions

Input 1 - 8 8 change-of-state inputs (CSI 1 ... CSI 8)

Input 9 / 10 Counter 1 / Gate 1




Table 38: Digital input module special functions

Product ID DI400




9.6 DI425 / DI426

9.6.1 Order Data




2DI426.6 2010 digital input module, 32 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms, sink/source,8 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately!



Table 39: DI425 / DI426 order data


General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs Total in 8 Groups of 324



24 VDC30 VDC


Input Resistance 4 kΩ


<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V


10 ms12 ms

1 ms1.2 ms





No





Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


9.7 DI725

9.7.1 Order Data



2DI725.6 2010 digital input module, 32 inputs 120/230 VAC, 50 ms, 8 electrically isolated input groups, Order terminal block separately!




Product ID DI725

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 32

Rated Voltage 120 / 230 VAC

Rated Frequency 50 / 60 Hz

Limits0-Signal UL0-Signal IL

40 VACMax. 15 mA




Max. 4 WMax. 7 W



2500 VAC

Different Circuits Possible Yes (but not different phases)






9.8 DI825

9.8.1 Order Data



2DI825.6 2010 digital input module, 8 namur inputs, Ex(i),12 V, 12 mA, electrically isolated and intrinsically safe, Order terminal block separately!




Product ID DI825

General Information

C-UL-US Listed In preparation




Number of Inputs 8

No Load Voltage 8.05 V ±5%

Maximum Values per Input Circuit 1)

Max. VoltageMax. CurrentMax. Power

12 V12 mA 36 mW

Valid Connected Values for Ignition Protection [EEx ia] IIC

Max. External CapacitanceMax. External Inductance

0.5 µF2 mH

Internal Resistance Approx. 1 kΩ

Open Line RecognitionSwitching RangeHysteresis

50 µA to 350 µATyp. 0.15 mA

Short Circuit RecognitionSwitching RangeHysteresis

100 W to 360 ΩTyp. 100 Ω

Switching ThresholdSwitching RangeHysteresis

1.2 mA to 2.1 mATyp. 0.5 mA






Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



The DI825 module is used to transfer digital signals from areas where there is a danger of explosions to areas which are not hazardous. This area of application requires that the input circuit of the DI825 module corresponds to ignition protection standard [EEx ia] IIC.

9.8.4 Standards Met

In addition to the standards conformed to by all B&R SYSTEM 2000 modules, the DI825 module also conforms to the European standards for "Electronic Equipment for Hazardous Locations (explosions)":



Yes / max. peak value for nominal voltage: 375 VYes / max. peak value for nominal voltage: 375 V

Intrinsically Safe Yes



1) Maximum values per inpuit circuit according to IEC 60079-11.

IEC 60079-0: 1977 + A1 ... A5 (VDE 0170/0171 part 1 withdrawn)Electronic equipment for hazardous locations (explosions), general requirements

IEC 60079-11: 1977 + A1 ... A2 (VDE 0170/0171 part 1 withdrawn)Electronic equipment for hazardous locations (explosions), intrinsic safety 'i'

Table 45: Standards for "Electronic Equipment for Hazardous Locations (explosions)"

Product ID DI825






Digital output modules are used to control external loads (relays, motors, solenoids). The states of the digital outputs are indicated by status LEDs.

The distinguishing features relevant for output modules are:

• Number of outputs

• Type (relay, transistors)

• Switching voltage

• Continuous current

10.2 Protective circuit

The transistor output modules DO428 and DO430 have overload protection and an internal protective circuit for overload peaks or reverse polarity. The braking voltage allows fast switching of inductive loads without external inverse diodes.

10.3 Overview

Module DO428 DO430 DO600 DO700 DO710

Number of Outputs 32 32 32 16 16

Type Transistor Transistor Relay Relay Relay

Switching Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC / 100 VAC 24 VDC / 230 VAC 30 VDC / 240 VAC

Continuous Current Max. 0.5 A Max. 2 A Max. 2 A Max. 2 A Max. 4 A

Table 46: Digital output module overview


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


10.4 DO428 / DO430

10.4.1 Order Data



2DO428.6 2010 digital output module, 32 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A,4 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately!

2DO430.6 2010 digital output module, 32 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 2 A,4 electrically isolated output groups, Order terminal block separately!



Table 47: DIO428 / DO430 order data


General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes





328

Design Transistor


18 VDC24 VDC30 VDC


Max. 0.5 AMax. 4 A

Max. 16 A

Max. 2 AMax. 12 A1)

Max. 48 A

Leakage Current when Switched Off 0.3 mA Max. 1.5 mA


Max. 5 WMax. 2 W per Group

Max. 2.9 W






Typ. 5 µs / max. 110 µsTyp. 60 µs / max. 100 µs








YesYesNo



1) Maximum simultaneousness factor = 75%, 24 of the 32 outputs can be fully loaded at the same time.




Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


10.5 DO600 / DO700

10.5.1 Order Data



DO600



DO700






General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of OutputsTotalin 8/4 Groups of

324

164

Design Relay / N.O.


120 VAC / 24 VDC144 VAC / 30 VDC

230 VAC / 24 VDC250 VAC / 30 VDC


Max. 2 AMax. 8 A

Max. 32 A

Max. 3 AMax. 8 A

Max. 16 A

Switching CapacityMinimumMaximum

1 mA / 5 VDC750 VA / 90 W

1 mA / 5 VDC750 VA / 90 W

Switching Frequency (nominal load) Max. 10 Hz

Power Consumption Max. 8 W Max. 6 W


Short Circuit Protection Fuse 10 A (at least 8 A) slow-blow per group

External Protective Circuit Generally required


Switching Delay Approx. 10 ms






YesYesNo






Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


10.6 DO710

10.6.1 Order Data



2DO710.6 2010 digital output module, 16 relay outputs 240 VAC / 30 VDC,4 A, single channel isolated outputs, Order terminal block separately!




Product ID DO710

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number and Type of Outputs 8 change-over contacts / 8 normally open contacts, single channel isolation is provided

Rated Voltage 30 VDC / 240 VAC

Switching Voltage Range Min. 5 VDC at 1 mA

Rated Frequency DC or 45 - 63 Hz

Rated Current (1-Signal) 4 A (resistive load)

Switching Capacity 2000 VA; 120 W at 30 VDC (resistive load)

Wiring 8 change-over contacts / 8 normally open contacts

Power Consumption Internal External

Max. 7 W Max. 8 W


Type of Protection

Short Circuit ProtectionACDC

Overvoltage Protection for Contacts

DC Connection

Fuse 8 A slow-blow (required externally)Fuse 4 A slow-blow (required externally)

Limited to 460 V (required externally)

Spark protection as required (to be connected externally)


Output Delay for Signal Changes fromlog 0 - log 1log 1 - log 0

Max. 13 ms (including chatter time)Max. 13 ms (including chatter time)





Total Output CurrentFollowing Condition must be FulfilledCable Cross Section

Max. 64 AΣ In² ≤400

2.5 mm², for currents ≥ 4 A or if a recommanded value is reached


1 min 2800 VAC or 4 kV with 1.2 x 50 µs pulse

Different Phases Possible Yes, but only for 110 VAC



Product ID DO710



Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010





In the PLC, analog data is always in 16 bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. Therefore, the resolution of the module used does not have to be taken into consideration when creating an application program.

All analog input modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D converter is active.

11.2 Overview



Input Signal ±10 V ±20 mA 0 to 25 mA





11.3 AI300 / AI700

11.3.1 Order Data



2AI300.6 2010 analog input module, 16 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!

2AI700.6 2010 analog input module, 16 inputs, +/-20 mA, 13 bit, Order terminal block separately!



Table 54: AI300 / AI700 order data

Product ID AI300 AI700

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 16


-10 to +10 V-20 to +20 V

-20 to +20 mA-30 to +30 mA


Differential Input Resistance 1 mΩ

Load 50 Ω

Voltage Drop at 20 mA 1 V




YesNo



Table 55: AI300 / AI700 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


11.4 AI730

11.4.1 Order Data



2AI730.6 2010 analog input module, 8 inputs, 0 - 25 mA, 16 bit, single channel isolation, Order terminal block separately!




Product ID AI730

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Input Type Current Signal 0 - 25 mA

Number of Inputs 8

Encoder SupplyVoltageCurrent

18 - 30 VDCMax. 30 mA

Common Potential between Channels None (single channel isolation)

Protection of all Channels against Incoming Voltage and Reverse Polarity

Up to 42 VDC


Input Impedance in Signal Range Max. 130 Ω

Power Consumption Max. 6 W + 1 W for each internally supplied encoder


Operating VoltageChannel to GroundChannel to ChannelChannel to Shield

Max. 300 VeffMax. 600 VeffMax. 300 Veff

Pulse Dielectric Strength at 2000 m above Sea LevelChannel to GroundChannel to ChannelChannel to Shield

4000 V4000 V2500 V








Analog output modules convert PLC internal numerical values into voltages or currents. The numerical values which are to be converted must be in 16 bit 2s complement. The conversion takes place independent of the resolution of the output module used.

All analog output modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the D/A converter is active.

12.2 Overview

Module AO300 AO725 AO900


Output Signal ±10 V 0 to 20 mA 8 x ±10 V 8 x 0 to 20 mA


Table 58: Analog output module overview


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


12.3 AO300 / AO725 / AO900

12.3.1 Order Data



2AO300.6 2010 analog output module, 16 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!

2AO725.6 2010 analog output module, 8 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!

2AO900.6 2010 analog output module, 8 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 8 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, Order terminal block separately!



Table 59: AO300 / AO725 / AO900 order data

Product ID AO300 AO725 AO900

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



Number of OutputsVoltage OutputsCurrent Outputs

16----

----8

88

Output SignalVoltageCurrent

-10 to +10 V----

-----0 to 20 mA

-10 to +10 V0 to 20 mA


Power Consumption Max. 10 W Max. 10 W Max. 12 W



YesNo

Voltage Outputs

Max. Load per Output ±10 mA (load ≥1 kΩ) --- ±10 mA (load ≥1 kΩ)

Current Outputs

Load --- Max. 600 Ω Max. 600 Ω



Table 60: AO300 / AO725 / AO900 technical data







For temperature measurements, the temperature module returns the measured value in 0.1 ° steps. That means a result of 750 corresponds to 75.0 °C. The data format 0.1 °C is supported by all temperature modules as standard. Some temperature modules can also be switched to other formats.

All temperature modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D converter is active.

13.2 Overview

Module AT300 AT610

Number of Channels 8 16

Measurement Range -50 to +450 °C -200 to +950 °C / -200 to +1,300 °C

Sensor PT100 / 3-line FeCuNi sensor (Type J + L)NiCrNi sensor (Type K)

Resolution 20000 steps Internal >14 bits

Table 61: Temperature module overview


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


13.3 AT300

13.3.1 Order Data



2AT300.6 2010 analog input module, 8 inputs, PT100 (3-line connection),-50 to +450 degrees C, Order terminal block separately!




Product ID AT300

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes





8 inputs - resistance measurement4



IEC/EN 60751

Measurement Range -50 to +450 °C

Internal Resolution 20000 steps

Measurement Current 2 mA (±0.2 %)



Electrical IsolationInput - PLCGroup - GroupInput - Input

YesYesNo






13.4 AT610

13.4.1 Order Data



2AT610.6 2010 analog input module, 16 inputs, temperature sensor, type L/J/K, -200 to +1300 degrees C, Order terminal block separately!




Product ID AT610

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Number of Inputs 16 differential inputs for thermocouples

Input GroupsGroup 1Group 2Group 3Group 4

4 groupsChannels 1 -4Channels 5 - 8Channels 9 -12Channels 13 -16

Input SignalNominalAllowed

-15 to +55 mV-20 to +20 V

Input Impedance in Signal Range >1 MΩ

Digital Converter Resolution Internal >14 bit (23841 internal ADC converter values in 20 ms) 1)

Temperature Measurement of the Internal Compensation Reference Junction

Temperature profile measurement on the module using four temperature sensors Compensation temperature measured separately for each channel



Electrical Isolation Input - PLCGroup 1 - Group 3Group 2 - Group 4Groups 1+3 - Groups 2+4Input - Input (same group)

YesNoNoYesNo

Max. Modulation Comapred to Ground Potential Between 2 Electrically Isolated Groups

±50 V±50 V



Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


Sensor

Setting for Sensor Type Individually for each group

Type FeCuNi FeCuNi NiCrNi

Type L J K

Standard DIN 43710 DIN IEC 584 DIN IEC 584

Measurement Voltage Range 2) -8.15 to 53.14 mV -7.89 to 54.95 mV -5.891 to 52.398 mV

Measurement Range -200.0 to +900.0 °C -200.0 to +950.0 °C -200.0 to +1,300.0 °C

Step Size 0.1 °C

Linearization Yes

Compensation MeasurementInternalExternal (adjustable)

-20 to +90 °C-100 to +200 °C

Raw Value Measurement

Setting Individually for each group

Standardization Standardized to 2 µV

Measurement Voltage Range -15 to +55 mV

Measurement Range Depends on sensor type

Linearization in CPU


Can be read----

AT600 Operation

SensorSortTypeStandardMeasurement Range in Steps of 0.1 °CLinearizationTerminal Temperature Compensation

FeCuNiL

DIN 43710-50.0 to +750.0 °C

Yes-20 to +90 °C from internal compensation measurement



1) The internal resolution is different depending on the measurement time, but the converter value is always scaled to 20 ms. This prevents a value from being changed when themeasurement time is changed!

2) Standardized to 0 °C compensation temperature.

Product ID AT610




14. Other Modules


The universal mixed module is a combination of digital input/output modules and analog input/output modules.

The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status LEDs. A status LED labeled "RUN" indicates that D/A and A/D conversion is active.

Module UM900

Digital Inputs

Number of Inputs 8


Switching Delay 1 ms

Digital Outputs

Number of Outputs 8

Switching Voltage 24 VDC


Analog Inputs

Number of Inputs 4

Input Signal 1)

1) Measurement range can be set with software

±10 V 0 to 20 mA


Analog Outputs

Number of Outputs 2

Output Signal 2)

2) Voltage/current according to the connection

±10 V 0 to 20 mA


Table 66: General information concerning other modules


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


14.2 UM900

14.2.1 Order Data



2UM900.6 2010 universal mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms, 8 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, 4 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 4 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12 bit, 2 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12 bit, 2 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 11 bit, Order terminal block separately!



Table 67: UM900 order data

Product ID UM900

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



Inputs/Outputs 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs 4 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs



Electrical IsolationInput - PLCOutput - PLCGroup 1 - Group 2Analog - Digital

YesYesYesYes

Digital Inputs

AmountTotalin 2 Groups of

84


Wiring Sink

Delay 0 to 1 Typ. 1 ms / max. 1.2 ms

Delay 1 to 0 Typ. 1 ms / max. 1.2 ms

Input Current at Nominal Voltage 5 mA

Digital Outputs

AmountTotalin 2 Groups of

84

Design Transistor

Rated Current 0.5 A

Table 68: UM900 technical data





Leakage Current (0 signal) 0.3 mA

Wiring Source

Protective Circuit External only if necessary (surge)

Short Circuit and Overload Protection Yes

Delay 0 to 1 Typ. 5 µs / max. 110 µs

Delay 1 to 0 Typ. 60 µs / max. 100 µs

Total Output Current 4 A

Analog Inputs

Amount 4

Measurement Ranges 1) ±10 V 0 to 20 mA


Input Impedance in Signal Range Approx. 1 MΩ 50 Ω

Analog Outputs

Amount 2

Output Signal 2) ±10 V 0 to 20 mA


Load Impedance Min. 1 kΩ Max. 600 Ω



1) Measurement range can be set using software.2) Signal corresponds to connection.

Product ID UM900

Table 68: UM900 technical data (cont.)


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



15.1 Overview

Module Description

IF100 2010 interface module, 64 + 404 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable

IF101 2010 interface module, 64 + 404 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 ETHERNET connection, BNC socket, electrically isolated, network capable

NW100 2010 PROFIBUS network module, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connecting to PROFIBUS networks




15.2 IF100 / IF101

15.2.1 Order Data



Interface Modules

2IF100.60-1 2010 interface module, 64 + 404 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable

2IF101.60-1 2010 interface module, 64 + 404 KB SRAM, 256 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 electrically isolated RS232/TTY, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 ETHERNET connection, BNC socket, electrically isolated, network capable

Accessories








Table 70: IF100 / IF101 order data

Product ID IF100 IF101

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Processor Section

Dual Ported RAM (DPR) 64 KByte SRAM (not buffered)

User RAM 404 KByte SRAM (not buffered)


PROM User PROM System PROM



Type RS232



Controller RISC (68302)


Maximum Baudrate 64 kBaud

Bus Capable No


Type RS232/TTY

Interface Selection Using software



Table 71: IF100 / IF101 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



Maximum DistanceRS232TTY

15 m / 19200 Baud300 m

Maximum BaudrateRS232TTY

64 kBaud64 kBaud

Bus Capable No


Type RS485/RS422

Interface Selection Using software





Maximum Baudrate 347 kBaud

Bus Capable Yes

Bus Coupling T-connector (model number 0G1000.00-090)


Type CAN



Controller Intel Controller 82527


Maximum BaudrateBus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m


Bus Capable Yes

Bus Coupling T-connector (model number 7AC911.9)

Application Interface IF5 (only IF101)

Type --- ETHERNET

Design --- 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket

Electrical Isolation --- Yes

Controller --- AM79C960

Maximum Baudrate --- 10 MBit/s

Bus Capable --- Yes

Bus Coupling --- Coax-T

Product ID IF100 IF101

Table 71: IF100 / IF101 technical data (cont.)



15.3 NW100

15.3.1 Order Data



PROFIBUS network module

2NW100.50-1 2010 PROFIBUS network module, 2 electrically isolated RS485 interfaces for connecting to PROFIBUS networks

Accessories




Table 72: NW100 order data

Product ID NW100

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes




Peripherals

Diagnosis LEDs Yes

Number Switch Four - used to set the module address, station address and baudrate



9.6 kBit/s19.2 kBit/s93.75 kBit/s187.5 kBit/s500 kBit/s

2 x RS4852 x 9 pin D-type socket


Max. 1,200 mMax. 1,200 mMax. 1,200 mMax. 1,000 mMax. 400 m

PROFIBUS DataTransfer ProtocolAccess ProcedureNumber of StationsTopologyCoupling to BusTransfer Media

According to PROFIBUS standard, DIN 19245 parts 1 and 2 Token passing principle with underlying master/slave principle

Max. 127 (with repeater) Physical bus


Table 73: NW100 technical data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010



16.1 Overview

Module Description

NC303 2010 ultrasonic transducer module, 1 pulse encoder input, 700 Hz, 24 VDC, 4 ultrasonic transducer inputs, 56 MHz, 4 digital inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink, 4 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 1 A, 4 analog inputs 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, 5 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal blocks separately!




16.2 NC303

16.2.1 Order Data



2NC303.60-1 2010 ultrasonic transducer module, 1 pulse encoder input, 700 Hz, 24 VDC, 4 ultrasonic transducer inputs, 56 MHz, 4 digital inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms, sink, 4 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 1 A, 4 analog inputs 0 to 10 V, 12 bit, 5 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12 bit, Order terminal blocks separately!




Product ID NC303

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes



Power Consumption 21 W +1.5 x encoder power

Processor Section

Communication RISC




Encoder Supply

Ultrasonic Transducer with Differential SignalsSupplyEncoder Supply VoltageLoad

Internal24 V ±10 %

Max. 160 mA

Pulse EncoderSupply External

Pulse Encoder Input

Use For RPM measurement (pulse counting and gate measurement)


24 VDC30 VDC



<5 V5 to 15 V

>15 V

Pulse Frequency Max. 700 Hz



Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


Gate Measurement Resolution 7.69 µs

Electrical Isolation Yes (optocoupler)

Channels for Path Measurement

Encoder Type Ultrasonic transducer with start/stop interface (differential signal)

Number of Channels 4

Input Resistance 500 Ω

Two Magnet Measurement Only possible for 1 channel

Input and Output Signals Differential Level

Internal Counter Frequency 56 MHz (positive edge)

Counter Size 21 Bit

Start Pulse Duration Approx. 1 µs

Pulse Ignored after Start Pulse Approx. 18 µs

Path Measurement Resolution 0.05 mm (ultrasonic speed = 2800 m/s)

Electrical IsolationChannel - PLCChannel - Channel

Yes (optocoupler)No

Analog Inputs

Amount 4 voltage inputs


0 to +10 V-20 V to +20 V


Differential Input Resistance >900 kΩ

Electrical Isolation Input – PLC Input – Input

Yes (optocoupler) No

Analog Outputs

Amount 5 voltage outputs

Output Signal -10 V to +10 V


Max. Load per Output 10 mA (load ≥1 kΩ)


Yes (optocoupler)No

Digital Inputs

Amount 4

Wiring Sink

Input Voltage Nominal Maximum

24 VDC 30 VDC

Input Current at Nominal Voltage Approx. 5.7 mA



<5 V5 to 11 V

>11 V


10 ms10 ms


Yes (optocoupler)No

Digital Outputs

Amount 4

Design Transistor

Wiring Sink

Supply Voltage (external)NominalMaximum

24 VDC30 VDC

Product ID NC303





The intelligent I/O processor module NC303 is a programmable I/O module with four channels for path measurement, and one channel for RPM measurement (RPM measurement using pulse counting and gate measurement). When software is installed, the processor in the path processor carries out the path measurement (with plausibility check) and the RPM measurement. The data from the path and RPM measurements is stored in DPR (Dual Port RAM) and can be read cyclically by the PLC CPU.

Parameters for path and RPM measurement can be defined by the user with function blocks. The respective software (including software documentation) can be obtained from B&R.

Continuous Current per Output Max. 1 A

Residual Voltage of Transistors Max. 0.5 V (at 1 A)

Overload and Short Circuit Protection 1) Polymer PTC protection device (Polyswitch™) 2)


Entry for resistive load≤100 µs≤100 µs



Yes (optocoupler)No


Dimensions B&R 2010 double width

1) Every digital output uses a Polymer PTC protection device for overload and short circuit protection. If an overload or short circuit occurs, the protective element becomes highlyresistive and breaks the flow of current. In order to activate the output again, the external supply must be turned off and the error (overload or short circuit) must be removed.After a reset time >10 seconds, the protective element returns to the conductive state.

2) Polyswitch™ is a registered trademark of RAYCHEM.

Product ID NC303



Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


17. Accessories

17.1 Overview





Table 77: Accessory overview



17.2 BM100

17.2.1 Order Data


Dummy modules are used to fill slots which are not needed. We recommend that you fill all unused slots with dummy modules.



Table 78: BM100 order data


Cha

pter

4B&

R S

YSTE

M 2

010


17.3 TB120 / TB140

17.3.1 Order Data



This double row terminal block is used for most modules in the B&R SYSTEM 2010 controller family.

Six position mechanical coding for each individual terminal block prevents accidentally switching neighboring terminal blocks e.g. after service. A patented lever mechanism is used to remove the terminal block. This eases use, even for 40 pin terminal blocks.

To prevent damage, stress relief is provided forthe I/O cable.



TB120 TB140


Table 79: TB120 / TB140 order data

Product ID TB120 TB140

Number of Pins 20 40

Type of Terminal Screw clamps

Distance between ContactsTerminal / TerminalLeft / Right Row

10.16 mm6.38 mm

5.08 mm6.38 mm

Creeping DistanceTerminal / TerminalLeft / Right Row

8.28 mm4.5 mm

3.2 mm4.5 mm

Nominal Voltage 250 VAC

Current Load 1)


Max. 12 A / contact

Dielectric StrengthTerminal / TerminalLeft / Right Row

>5 kV5 kV

3.5 kV5 kV

Wire Cross Section 0.20 mm² (AWG24) – 2.5 mm² (AWG12)


Removal Mechanical

Stress Relief Using cable tie

Table 80: TB120 / TB140 technical data



18. Manuals

18.1 Overview


MASYS22010-0 B&R 2010 User Manual, German

MASYS22010-E B&R 2010 User Manual, English

Table 81: Manual Overview


Cha

pter

5B&

R L

ogic

Sca

nner

B&R Logic Scanner • Module Overview

Chapter 5 • B&R Logic Scanner

1. Module Overview

Product ID Description Model No. Page

CPUs

LS251 Logic Scanner CPU LS251, 32 bit half size PCI card, 2 MB DRAM, 1 MB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 remote I/O master (RS485), 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable

5LS251.60-1 346


LS071 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable 5LS071.9 350

LS079 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, supplied by ext. 24 VDC power supply

5LS079.9 352

Manuals

--- Logic Scanner LS251 User’s Manual, German MASYS2LS-0 354

--- Logic Scanner LS251 User’s Manual, English MASYS2LS-E 354

Table 1: B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner module overview


B&R Logic Scanner • General Information


An increasing number of open and closed loop control processes use a hardware neutral PC for visualization. The process data is collected in a central controller and transferred to the PC using a point-to-point or network connection. When using the Logic Scanner CPU LS251, the controller no longer has to handle the data collection process. The CPU is a PCI bus insert card which can be operated in any PC with a PCI bus slot.

The card is equipped with a powerful, highly integrated PLC CPU. This CPU executes the entire control program. Therefore, a remote CPU in the PLC rack is no longer necessary. Connections to inputs and outputs in the field are made via a CAN field bus or a remote I/O bus. The master function is handled by the LS251.

2.1 B&R PLC Operating System

The use of a powerful processor on the CPU LS251 allows the control program to be executed completely independent of the performance requirements for visualization. The B&R PLC operating system guarantees stabile, real-time capable and deterministic multitasking which is not influenced by the operating status of the visualization software or the PC operating system.

The Logic Scanner CPU LS251 is not affected by a software reset triggered with [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Del] or if the PC comes to a standstill.

2.1.1 Compatibility

Programming is fully compatible to B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010 systems. Therefore, existing programs can be used directly.

2.1.2 High Performance

The integration of the CPU and field bus connections for CAN and remote I/O on an insert card also guarantees the highest level of performance when accessing remote inputs and outputs. Short cycle times up to 1 ms are possible.

2.1.3 Powerful Visualization

The visualization unit can access process data very fast via the PCI bus. Delays during screen regeneration no longer occur.

2.1.4 Additional Interfaces

The LS071 or LS079 expansion cards increase the interface possibilities by providing an RS232 and a CAN interface. The expansion cards are connected to the CPU LS251 using a ribbon cable.

2.1.5 External Power Supply for the Logic Scanner CPU LS251

The LS079 expansion card enables the LS251 to use an external 24 VDC power supply. The supply is then fully independent of the PC.


Cha

pter

5B&

R L

ogic

Sca

nner

B&R Logic Scanner • CPUs

3. CPUs

3.1 Overview

Module Description

LS251 Logic Scanner CPU LS251, 32 bit half size PCI card, 2 MB DRAM, 1 MB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 remote I/O master (RS485), 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable




3.2 LS251

3.2.1 Order Data

The following expansion cards are available for the Logic Scanner CPU LS251:

User's manuals see section "Manuals".



CPU

5LS251.60-1 Logic Scanner CPU LS251, 32 bit half size PCI card, 2 MB DRAM, 1 MB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 remote I/O master (RS485), 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable

Accessories




0AC916.9 Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply: 120 / 230 VAC

The CPU LS251 is delivered with a lithium battery.

Table 3: LS251 order data


5LS071.9 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable

5LS079.9 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, ext. 24 VDC power supply

Table 4: LS251 expansion card order data

Product ID LS251

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Design PCI Half Size Card Plug & Play

Power ConsumptionWithout Expansion CardWith LS071With LS079

Max. 7.75 WMax. 8.5 WMax. 13 W

Operating Temperature 0 - 55 °C

Processor Section

Processor Architecture 32 Bit

Typical Instruction Cycle Time 0.2 µs

Data and Program Code Cache 2 x 256 Byte

Standard MemoryRAMSystem RAMUser RAMSystem PROMUser PROM

2 MByte DRAM174 KByte SRAM 850 KByte SRAM


Data BufferingBackup BatteryBattery MonitoringBuffer Duration

Lithium battery 3 V / 950 mAh Yes

Min. 4 years

Peripherals


Nonvolatile1 s

Status Display LEDs

Interface Expansion With expansion card LS071 or LS079 in neighboring slot, 1 x CAN, 1 x RS232


Table 5: LS251 technical data


Cha

pter

5B&

R L

ogic

Sca

nner


3.2.3 Buffering the RAM

Buffering RAM (program and data memory) and nonvolatile operation of the real-time clock are guaranteed by the lithium battery provided.

3.2.4 PC Resources

PCI Bus

The CPU LS251 is an insert card for the PCI bus. The following points are important features of the PCI bus:

• Fast data transfer

• 33 MHz transfer frequency

• 32 bit data bus

• Plug & Play

Plug & Play

The Plug & Play technology eases installation of the insert card. BIOS recognizes the PCI modules while booting and assigns their physical addresses. If a module is removed or added, no setting have to be made by the user.

Type Remote I/O Master (RS485)






Number of Slaves Max. 31 (without repeater)

Are Intelligent Slaves Possible with CPU Yes

Protocol Handling With separate processor

Transfer Time 897 µs for 64 digital I/O and 16 analog I/O




Network Capable Yes



Type CAN




Maximum BaudrateBus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 -200 m Bus Length 800 -1,000 m


Multi-master Capable Yes

Number of Stations Max. 64 (without repeater)


Priority Using object identifier

Protocol According to CiA/CAL

Transfer Media 4 conductor shielded cable, twisted pair

Network Capable Yes

Termination Resistance Optional (externally wired)

Product ID LS251

Table 5: LS251 technical data (cont.)



Interrupt

The CPU LS251 uses an interrupt. It is automatically assigned by the Plug & Play technology while booting.

Memory

The memory is automatically assigned while booting. The following memory areas are used by the CPU LS251:

Memory Size Memory Area

1 x 1 MByte Extended Memory (>1 MByte)

1 x 2 MByte Extended Memory (>1 MByte)

Table 6: LS251 memory


Cha

pter

5B&

R L

ogic

Sca

nner

B&R Logic Scanner • Communication Modules


4.1 Overview



5LS079.9 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS079, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, Supplied by an ext. 24 VDC power supply




4.2 LS071

4.2.1 Order Data



Expansion Card


Accessories




Product ID LS071

General Information

C-UL-US Listed Yes

Design Inserted mechanically in the slot next to the Logic Scanner CPU, but does not make contact to the PCI or ISA slot

Supply From the CPU LS251 via a ribbon cable

Power Consumption Including LS251 max. 8.5 W



Type RS232









Network Capable No



1 / 2


Type CAN

Electrical Isolation IF4 - LS071 IF3 - IF4

YesYes



Maximum BaudrateBus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 - 200 m Bus Length 800 - 1,000 m



Number of Stations Max. 64



Cha

pter

5B&

R L

ogic

Sca

nner



The CPU LS251 is equipped with field bus connections for CAN and remote I/O. The LS071 expansion card increases the interface possibilities by providing an RS232 and a CAN interface. The module is connected to the LS251 using a ribbon cable.





Network Capable Yes


Product ID LS071

Table 9: LS071 technical data (cont.)



4.3 LS079

4.3.1 Order Data



Expansion Card

5LS079.9 Logic Scanner Expansion Card LS071, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network capable, supplied by ext. 24 VDC power supply

Accessories




Product ID LS079

General Information

C-UL-US Listed In preparation

Design Inserted mechanically in the slot next to the Logic Scanner CPU, but does not make contact to the PCI or ISA slot

Supply External Internal

Using a 24 VDC power supply From the CPU LS251 via a ribbon cable

External Supply Voltage Range 18 - 30 VDC


Fuse Internal: 1.5 A Picofuse

Power Consumption of the LS079 and LS251

External SupplySupplied via the PC

Max. 13 WMax. 13 W



Type RS232









Network Capable No



1 / 2


Type CAN

Electrical Isolation IF4 - LS079 IF3 - IF4

YesYes




Cha

pter

5B&

R L

ogic

Sca

nner



The CPU LS251 is equipped with field bus connections for CAN and remote I/O. The LS079 expansion card increases the interface possibilities by providing an RS232 and a CAN interface. The module is connected to the LS251 using a ribbon cable.

4.3.4 External Power Supply for the CPU LS251

The LS079 expansion card enables the LS251 to use an external 24 VDC power supply. The power supply is connected to the LS079. The LS251 supply is connected using a special cable. The supply is then fully independent of the PC.

If the external power supply fails, the CPU and expansion card are supplied by the internal PC power supply (redundant supply).


Maximum BaudrateBus Length 10 - 60 m Bus Length 100 - 200 m Bus Length 800 - 1,000 m



Number of Stations Max. 64





Network Capable Yes


Product ID LS079



B&R Logic Scanner • Manuals

5. Manuals

5.1 Overview


MASYS2LS-0 Logic Scanner LS251 User's Manual, German

MASYS2LS-E Logic Scanner LS251 User's Manual, English



Cha

pter

6Ac

cess

orie

s

Accessories • Overview

Chapter 6 • Accessories

1. Overview

Model Number Description Page

0AC001.9 Retaining Clips (500 pieces) ---

0AC171.9 Glass tube fuses 5 x 20 mm, 20 pcs., 3.15 A T / 250 V ---

0AC200.9 Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, cylindrical battery ---

0AC201.9 Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell ---

0AC401.9 Encoder 5 V - 24 V, converter for 5 V encoders (abs. or incr.) 356

0AC410.9 Interface Converter TTY - RS232 356

0AC912.9 Bus Adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface 357

0AC913.92 Bus Adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable 358

0AC916.9 Bus Termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC

359

0G0001.00-090 Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable ---

0G0010.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 ---

0G0012.00-090 Cable I/O bus expansion, 2 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 ---

0G1000.00-090 Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O 359

0MC111.9 PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB FlashPROM ---

0MC211.9 PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB SRAM ---

7AC911.9 Bus Connector, CAN 360

0TB124.91 Accessory, terminal block, 2x12 pin, cage clamps, 1.0 mm2 361

7TB710.9 Terminal block, 10 pin, screw clamps 362

7TB710.91 Terminal block, 10 pin, cage clamps 362

7TB710:90-01 Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., screw clamps 362

7TB710:91-01 Terminal block, 10 pin, 30 pcs., cage clamps 362









ECINT1-1 RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted pair bus, without lightning protection

365

ECINT1-11 RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted pair bus, with lightning protection

365

Table 1: General accessories overview


Accessories • General Accessories

2. General Accessories

2.1 AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V

2.1.1 Order Data


The adapter is used as a converter for 5 V encoders. The 5 V differential signals delivered by the encoder are converted to 24 V signals. Absolute and incremental encoders can be used.

2.2 AC410 Interface Converter

2.2.1 Order Data


The AC410 interface converter is used to convert a TTY signal into an RS232 signal or an RS232 signal into a TTY signal. To be able to connect simple PANELWARE operator panels (e.g. P120 or P121), the 24 V supply voltage is converted into a 5 V output voltage. This voltage can be loaded with up to 0.5 A.

The maximum baudrate is 19200 Baud.


0AC401.9 Encoder 5 V - 24 V, converter for 5 V encoders (abs. or incr.)

Table 2: AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V order data


0AC410.9 Interface Converter TTY - RS232

Table 3: AC410 interface converter order data


Cha

pter

6Ac

cess

orie

s


2.3 AC912 Bus Adapter, CAN 1x

2.3.1 Order Data


The CAN bus adapters is used to connect a controller to a CAN network. The network connection is made using the 6 pin terminal block. The connection to the controller is made using the 9 pin D-type socket. The termination resistor is integrated in the bus adapter. The terminating resistor can be turned on or off. The cable from the controller to the bus adapter is not in the B&R product line. It must be constructed by the customer.


0AC912.9 Bus Adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface

Table 4: AC912 bus adapter, CAN 1x, order data



2.4 AC913 Bus Adapter, CAN 2x

2.4.1 Order Data


The CAN bus adapters is used to connect a controller to a CAN network. The network connection is made using the 9 pin D-type plug (C1) and the 9 pin D-type socket (C2). The 6 pin terminal block has a 30 cm long cable with a D-type housing attached. This cable is used to make the connection to the controller. The termination resistor is integrated in the bus adapter. The terminating resistor can be turned on or off.


0AC913.92 Bus Adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable

Table 5: AC913 bus adapter, CAN 2x, order data


Cha

pter

6Ac

cess

orie

s


2.5 AC916 Bus Termination, RS485 Active

2.5.1 Order Data


An active bus termination is available for PROFIBUS networks and remote I/O. The active bus termination allows the network to be terminated independent of the supply for the communication modules.

The supply voltage for the active bus termination is 120 / 230 VAC.

2.6 RS485 Bus Connector

2.6.1 Order Data


The RS485 bus connector is used to connect a controller to remote I/O, in a PROFIBUS network or in a RS485 network. The termination resistor is integrated in the bus connector. The terminating resistor can be turned on or off.


0AC916.9 Bus Termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC

Table 6: AC916 bus termination , RS485 active order data


0G1000.00-090 Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O

Table 7: RS485 bus connector order data



2.7 AC911 Bus Connector, CAN

2.7.1 Order Data



The bus connector enables you to:

• Exchange a CAN node without shutting down the network since the connection is not broken,

• Change the termination resistance quickly and easily (e.g. if the last node in a network is removed).



Table 8: AC911 bus connector, CAN order data

Product ID AC911

Lines Connections for two bus lines

Termination Resistance 120 Ω - can be switched on

Stress Relief Built-in

Table 9: AC911 bus connector, CAN technical data


Cha

pter

6Ac

cess

orie

s


2.8 TB124 24 Pin Terminal Block

2.8.1 Order Data



0TB124.91 Accessory, terminal block, 2x12 pin, cage clamps, 1.0 mm2

Table 10: TB124 24 pin terminal block order data

Product ID TB124

Number of Pins 24

Type of Terminal 2-row cage clamp terminal block



Current Load 1)

1) Observe the respective limit data for the I/O modules!

Max. 5 A / contact

Wire Cross Section 0.5 mm² - 1 mm²


Table 11: TB124 24 pin terminal block technical data




2.9.1 Order Data



This single row 10 pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. The terminal block can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module.



TB710.9

TB710.91





Product ID TB710

Number of Pins 10



Resistance between Contacts 6 mW


Current Load 1)


Max. 12 A / contact



Removal Mechanical

Table 13: TB710 10 Pin Terminal Block


Cha

pter

6Ac

cess

orie

s



2.10.1 Order Data



This single row 12 pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. Removal is simplified by two ejection levers on the terminal block.



TB712.9

TB712.91





Product ID TB712

Number of Pins 12




Current Load 1)


Max. 12 A / contact



Removal Mechanical





2.11.1 Order Data



This single row 18 pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. Removal is simplified by two ejection levers on the terminal block.



TB718.9

TB718.91





Product ID TB718

Number of Pins 18




Current Load 1)


Max. 12 A / contact



Removal Mechanical



Cha

pter

6Ac

cess

orie

s


2.12 INT1 Interface Converter

2.12.1 Order Data


The INT1 interface converter is used to convert RS232 interface signals to an RS485 signal level. It is used if:

• Data transfer over a long distance is required which cannot be bridged by an RS232 interface. The distance between two stations can be max. 5000 m when using shielded RS485 cables.

• Electrical isolation is required for the interface.

• A PLC is to be connected to a network using an RS232 interface.

The interface converter INT1 has lightning protection.

2.12.3 Supply

The INT1 interface converter requires an external 24 VDC supply voltage. Current consumption can be max. 400 mA.


ECINT1-1 RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted pair bus, without lightning protection

ECINT1-11 RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted pair bus, with lightning protection

Table 18: INT1 interface converter order data




Cha

pter

7St

anda

rds

and

Cer

tific

atio

ns

Standards and Certifications • Standards and Limits Used

Chapter 7 • Standards and Certifications

1. Standards and Limits Used

The product standard IEC 61131-2 is generally valid for B&R industrial products. The following standards provide a detailed definition of proper functionality in a typical industrial environment (charged with electromagnetic energy):

1.1 Limits

Standard Description

IEC 50081-2IEC 61000-6-4

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Generic standard - emission standard -Part 2: Industrial environment (EN 50081-2 will be replaced by IEC 61000-6-4)

IEC 50082-2IEC 61000-6-2

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Generic standard, emission standard -Part 2: Industrial environments (EN 50082-2 has been replaced by EN/IEC 61000-6-2)

EN 55022/CISPR 22 Information technology equipment - radio disturbance characteristics - limits and measuring procedures

EN 55024/CISPR 22 Information technology equipment - immunity characteristics - limits and testing procedures

IEC 60204-1 Safety of machinery - electrical equipment on machines - Part 1: General requirements

EN 60950/CISPR 22 Safety of information technology equipment

IEC 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits; Section 2:Limits for harmonic currents in low voltage systems

IEC 61000-3-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits; Section 3:Limits for voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage systems

IEC 61131-2 Programmable logic controllers - Part 2: Equipment requirements and tests

IEC 61800-3 Adjustable speed electric drives - Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods

UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment, (UL = Underwriters Laboratories)

IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge

IEC 61131-2 (Ed. 2) B&R Limit Value

Contact discharge to powder-coated and bare metal parts 4 kV 8 kV

Air discharge to plastic parts 8 kV 15 kV

IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic Fields

Housing, completely wired 80 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m, 80 % amplitude modulation with 1 kHz

IEC 61000-4-4 Burst, Fast Transients

IEC 61131-2 (Ed. 2) B&R Limit Value

Supply lines 2 kV, 1 min 4 kV, 5 min

All other lines 1 kV, 1 min 2 kV, 5 min

IEC 61000-4-5 Surge

Limits CM, unsymmetrical

Limits DM, symmetrical

AC power supplies 2 kV (12 Ω) 1 kV (2 Ω)

DC power supplies 1 kV (12 Ω) 0.5 kV (2 Ω)

Digital and analog I/O, AC, unshielded

AC auxiliary voltage outputs for sensors, etc. 2 kV (42 Ω) 1 kV (42 Ω)

Digital and analog I/O, DC, unshieldedData lines, unshieldedDC auxiliary voltage outputs for sensors, etc.

0.5 kV (42 Ω) 0.5 kV (42 Ω)

All shielded lines 1 kV (2 Ω) ---


Standards and Certifications • Standards and Limits Used

1.2 International Standards

B&R products and services comply with all applicable standards. These are international standards from organizations such as ISO, IEC and CENELEC, as well as national standards of organizations such as UL, CSA, FCC, VDE, ÖVE, etc. We give special consideration to the reliability of our products in an industrial environment. Therefore, e.g. the requirements of product standard IEC 61131-2 concerning electromagnetic immunity are exceeded considerably.

IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted Disturbances (radio frequency)

Network I/O Signal connections >10 m Functional ground

150 kHz - 80 MHz, 10 V, (in broadcast range 3 V) 80 % amplitude modulation with 1 kHz

IEC 60664-1 Pollution Degree

Pollution degree 2: non-conductive material

IEC 60068-2-6, Test Fc Vibration Test

Frequency Range [Hz] Continuous Periodic

10 ≤ f < 57 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.075 mm amplitude

57 ≤ f ≤ 150 0.5 g constant acceleration 1 g constant acceleration

f > 150 not defined not defined

IEC 60068-2-27, Test Ea Shock Test

15 g over 11 ms, half sine wave in all three perpendicular axes.

Certifications

USA and Canada All important B&R products are tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories and are checked quarterly by a UL inspector.This mark is valid for the USA and Canada and eases certification of your machines and systems in these areas.

Europe All harmonized EN standards for the valid guidelines are met.

Russian Federation

GOST-R certification is available for the export of all B&R products in the Russian Federation.

The entire B&R SYSTEM 2005 is certified by Bureau Veritas.Bureau Veritas is one of the largest organizations in the world for classifying ships, drilling platforms, etc.


Index

Numerics

0AC001.9 ..................................................................... 3550AC171.9 ..................................................................... 3550AC200.9 ..................................................................... 3550AC201.9 ..................................................................... 3550AC240.9 ..................................................................... 2560AC401.9 ..................................................................... 3560AC410.9 ..................................................................... 3560AC912.9 ..................................................................... 3570AC913.92 ................................................................... 3580AC916.9 ..................................................................... 3590G0001.00-090 ............................................................ 3550G0010.00-090 ............................................................ 3550G0012.00-090 ............................................................ 3550G1000.00-090 ............................................................ 3590G2001.00-090 ............................................................ 2570MC111.9 ..................................................................... 3550MC211.9 ..................................................................... 3550TB124.91 .................................................................... 3612AI300.6 ....................................................................... 3202AI700.6 ....................................................................... 3202AI730.6 ....................................................................... 3212AO300.6 ..................................................................... 3232AO725.6 ..................................................................... 3232AO900.6 ..................................................................... 3232AT300.6 ...................................................................... 3252AT610.6 ...................................................................... 3262BM100.9 ..................................................................... 3402BP101.3 ..................................................................... 2782BP110.3 ..................................................................... 2782BP200.4 ..................................................................... 2782BP201.4 ..................................................................... 2782BP202.4 ..................................................................... 2782BP210.4 ..................................................................... 2782BP300.4 ..................................................................... 2782CP100.60-1 ................................................................ 2912CP104.60-1 ................................................................ 2912CP200.60-1 ................................................................ 2912CP210.60-1 ................................................................ 2912DI400.6 ....................................................................... 3062DI425.6 ....................................................................... 3082DI426.6 ....................................................................... 3082DI725.6 ....................................................................... 3092DI825.6 ....................................................................... 3102DO428.6 ..................................................................... 3132DO430.6 ..................................................................... 3132DO600.6 ..................................................................... 3152DO700.6 ..................................................................... 3152DO710.6 ..................................................................... 3172DS100.60-1 ................................................................ 2942DS101.60-1 ................................................................ 2972EX100.50-1 ................................................................ 2862EX200.50-1 ................................................................ 2862EX301.5 ..................................................................... 2882EX302.5 ..................................................................... 2882IF100.60-1 .................................................................. 3322IF101.60-1 .................................................................. 3322ME910.90-1 ................................................................ 3032ME913.90-1 ................................................................ 3032ME915.90-1 ................................................................ 3032MP100.5 ..................................................................... 3002NC303.60-1 ................................................................ 3362NW100.50-1 ............................................................... 3342PS425.9 ..................................................................... 282

2PS740.9 ..................................................................... 2832TB120.9 ..................................................................... 3412TB140.9 ..................................................................... 3412UM900.6 .................................................................... 3293AI350.6 ....................................................................... 2093AI375.6 ....................................................................... 2093AI775.6 ....................................................................... 2093AM050.6 ..................................................................... 2133AM051.6 ..................................................................... 2153AM055.6 ..................................................................... 2173AM374.6 ..................................................................... 2193AO350.6 ..................................................................... 2113AO775.6 ..................................................................... 2113AT350.6 ..................................................................... 2223AT450.6 ..................................................................... 2223AT660.6 ..................................................................... 2243BM150.9 ..................................................................... 2583BP150.4 ..................................................................... 1603BP150.41 ................................................................... 1603BP151.4 ..................................................................... 1603BP151.41 ................................................................... 1603BP152.4 ..................................................................... 1603BP152.41 ................................................................... 1603BP155.4 ..................................................................... 1603BP155.41 ................................................................... 1603CP260.60-1 ................................................................ 1753DI450.60-9 ................................................................. 1893DI475.6 ...................................................................... 1913DI476.6 ...................................................................... 1913DI477.6 ...................................................................... 1933DI486.6 ...................................................................... 1943DI695.6 ...................................................................... 1953DM455.60-2 ............................................................... 1853DM476.6 .................................................................... 2063DO479.6 ..................................................................... 1973DO480.6 ..................................................................... 1973DO650.6 ..................................................................... 1993DO690.6 ..................................................................... 2013DO750.6 ..................................................................... 1993DO760.6 ..................................................................... 2033EX150.60-1 ................................................................ 1693EX250.60-1 ................................................................ 1713EX350.6 ..................................................................... 1733IF050.6 ....................................................................... 2273IF060.6 ....................................................................... 2293IF260.60-1 .................................................................. 1773IF613.9 ....................................................................... 2303IF621.9 ....................................................................... 2313IF622.9 ....................................................................... 2333IF661.9 ....................................................................... 2353IF671.9 ....................................................................... 2363IF672.9 ....................................................................... 2383IF681.95 ..................................................................... 2403IF681.96 ..................................................................... 2423IP161.60-1 ................................................................. 1793NC150.6 ..................................................................... 2463NC154.60-2 ................................................................ 2483NC157.60-1 ................................................................ 2523NW150.60-1 ............................................................... 2443PS465.9 ..................................................................... 1633PS477.9 ..................................................................... 1633PS692.9 ..................................................................... 1653PS694.9 ..................................................................... 1653PS792.9 ..................................................................... 1673PS794.9 ..................................................................... 167


Index

3TB162.9 ...................................................................... 2593TB170:91-02 .............................................................. 2603TB170.9 ...................................................................... 2603TB170.91 .................................................................... 2603TB170:90-02 .............................................................. 2603XP152.60-2 ................................................................ 1825LS071.9 ...................................................................... 3505LS079.9 ...................................................................... 3525LS251.60-1 ................................................................. 3467AC010.9 ..................................................................... 1417AC011.9 ..................................................................... 1427AC020.9 ..................................................................... 1417AC911.9 ..................................................................... 3607AF101.7 ........................................................................ 677AI261.7 ....................................................................... 1057AI294.7 ....................................................................... 1077AI351.70 ..................................................................... 1087AI354.70 ..................................................................... 1097AI774.70 ..................................................................... 1107AO352.70 ................................................................... 1127AT324.70 .................................................................... 1147AT352.70 .................................................................... 1167AT664.70 .................................................................... 1177BP701.1 ....................................................................... 467BP702.0 ....................................................................... 467BP702.1 ....................................................................... 467BP703.0 ....................................................................... 467BP704.0 ....................................................................... 467BP705.0 ....................................................................... 467BP706.0 ....................................................................... 467BP707.0 ....................................................................... 467BP708.0 ....................................................................... 467BP709.0 ....................................................................... 467BP710.0 ....................................................................... 467CM211.7 ..................................................................... 1207CM411.70-1 ............................................................... 1237CP430.60-1 .................................................................. 567CP470.60-2 .................................................................. 567CP474.60-1 .................................................................. 567CP476.60-1 .................................................................. 607CP770.60-1 .................................................................. 567CP774.60-1 .................................................................. 567DI135.70 ....................................................................... 707DI138.70 ....................................................................... 727DI140.70 ....................................................................... 747DI435.7 ......................................................................... 767DI439.7 ......................................................................... 777DI439.72 ....................................................................... 797DI645.7 ......................................................................... 817DM435.7 ....................................................................... 987DM438.72 ................................................................... 1007DM465.7 ..................................................................... 1027DO135.70 ..................................................................... 837DO138.70 ..................................................................... 857DO164.70 ..................................................................... 877DO435.7 ....................................................................... 897DO720.7 ....................................................................... 917DO721.7 ....................................................................... 937DO722.7 ....................................................................... 957EX270.50-1 .................................................................. 497EX470.50-1 .................................................................. 507EX477.50-2 .................................................................. 527EX770.50-1 .................................................................. 507EX777.50-1 .................................................................. 527IF311.7 ....................................................................... 134

7IF321.7 ....................................................................... 1357IF361.70-1 .................................................................. 1367IF371.70-1 .................................................................. 1377ME010.9 ..................................................................... 1257ME020.9 ..................................................................... 1277ME770.5 ....................................................................... 647MM424.70-1 ............................................................... 1297MM432.70-1 ............................................................... 1317NC161.7 ..................................................................... 1397TB710:91-01 .............................................................. 3627TB710.9 ..................................................................... 3627TB710.91 ................................................................... 3627TB710:90-01 .............................................................. 3627TB712:91-02 .............................................................. 3637TB712.9 ..................................................................... 3637TB712.91 ................................................................... 3637TB712:90-02 .............................................................. 3637TB718:91-02 .............................................................. 3647TB718.9 ..................................................................... 3647TB718.91 ................................................................... 3647TB718:90-02 .............................................................. 3647TB722.9 ..................................................................... 1437TB722.91 ................................................................... 1437TB733.9 ..................................................................... 1447TB733.91 ................................................................... 1447TB736.9 ..................................................................... 1457TB736.91 ................................................................... 1457TB754.9 ..................................................................... 1467TB754.91 ................................................................... 1467TB772.91 ................................................................... 147

A

AccessoriesB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 141B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 255B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 339

Adapter ModuleB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 65

Analog Input ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 104B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 208B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 319

Analog Interface (AF) ModuleB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 65

Analog Mixed ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 212

Analog Output ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 111B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 210B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 322

B

B&R SYSTEM 2000Combination Possibilities ...................................... 25, 26Local Expansion ......................................................... 19Modular Construction ................................................. 13Program Memory Modules ......................................... 18Remote Expansion ..................................................... 21Supply Voltage ........................................................... 16System and I/O Bus .................................................... 14Terminal Blocks .......................................................... 17

B&R SYSTEM 2000 Control Family ............................... 13


Index

B&R SYSTEM 2003Environmental Temperature ....................................... 45Installation ................................................................... 39Installation Dimensions ............................................... 37Module Rack ............................................................... 32Module Slot Rules ....................................................... 43Modules ...................................................................... 34Mounting Rail .............................................................. 32Relative Humidity ........................................................ 45Terminal Block ............................................................ 42

B&R SYSTEM 2005Basic Module Construction ....................................... 154Dimensions ............................................................... 154Environmental Temperature ..................................... 159Installation ................................................................. 156Module Rack ............................................................. 155Mounting Rail ............................................................ 155Relative Humidity ...................................................... 159Terminal Block TB170 .............................................. 158

B&R SYSTEM 2010Basic Module Construction ....................................... 267Differences between System and I/O Modules ......... 268Environmental Temperature ..................................... 274Installation ................................................................. 270Module Rack ............................................................. 269Mounting Rail ............................................................ 270Relative Humidity ...................................................... 274Terminal Block TB120 / TB140 ................................. 273

Battery Module ............................................................. 256Bus Controller Modules

B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 48B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 169B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 285

C

CAN Bus ControllerB&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 48

Certifications ................................................................ 367Coding 2010 Terminal Blocks ...................................... 274Combination Modules

B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 119Communication Modules

B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 133B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 226B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 331Logic Scanner ........................................................... 349

Configuration Memory .................................................... 64Counter and Positioning Modules

B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 138B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 245B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 335

CPUsB&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 54B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 174B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 289Logic Scanner ........................................................... 345

D

Digital Input ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 68B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 187B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 304

Digital Mixed ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 97B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 205

Digital Output ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 82B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 196B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 312

DimensionsB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 32B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 154B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 267

DocumentationB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 147

Drum Sequencer .................................................. 294, 297

E

ECINT1-1 ..................................................................... 365ECINT1-11 ................................................................... 365Encoder Module ........................................................... 139

G

General Accessories .................................................... 355

I

International Standards ................................................ 368

L

Local Expansion ............................................................. 19Local I/O Master Controller .......................................... 173Logic Scanner

Additional Interfaces ................................................. 344B&R PLC Operating System .................................... 344Communication Modules .......................................... 349Compatibility ............................................................. 344CPUs ........................................................................ 345External Power Supply ............................................. 344General Information .................................................. 344High Performance ..................................................... 344Manuals .................................................................... 354Powerful Visualization .............................................. 344

M

ManualsB&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................. 147B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 261B&R SYSTEM 2010 ................................................. 342Logic Scanner ........................................................... 354

MASYS22003-0 ........................................................... 147MASYS22003-E ........................................................... 147MASYS22005-0 ........................................................... 261MASYS22005-E ........................................................... 261MASYS22010-0 ........................................................... 342MASYS22010-E ........................................................... 342MASYS2LS-0 ............................................................... 354MASYS2LS-E .............................................................. 354Modular Construction ..................................................... 13Module Overview

B&R SYSTEM 2003 ................................................... 27B&R SYSTEM 2005 ................................................. 149


Index

B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 263Logic Scanner ........................................................... 343

Module RackB&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 46B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 159B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 275

Module Slot RulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 43

Multiprocessor .............................................................. 300

O

Other ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 119B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 328

P

Positioning Module ...................................... 138, 245, 335Power Supply Modules

B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 161B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 279

PROFIBUS Network Module ................................244, 334Program Memory Modules ............................................. 18

B&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 63B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 302

Programmable ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 184B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 293

R

Remote Expansion ......................................................... 21Remote I/O ..................................................................... 21

S

Screw-in ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................... 65

Standards ..................................................................... 367Standards and Certifications ........................................ 367Supply Voltage ............................................................... 16System and I/O Bus ....................................................... 14

T

Temperature ModulesB&R SYSTEM 2003 .................................................. 113B&R SYSTEM 2005 .................................................. 221B&R SYSTEM 2010 .................................................. 324

Terminal Blocks .............................................................. 17

U

Universal Mixed Module ............................................... 329


B&R ControlSystems Overview Catalog 11/2001

Perfection in Automation

MASYS2KAT-E

B&

RC

on

tr

olS

ys

te

ms

Ov

er

vie

wC

at

alo

g1

1/2

00

1

Documents

ControlSystem E